blob: b2b8c248b9959afa5aa177d6383b604117fd2bda [file] [log] [blame]
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00001//===- SimplifyCFG.cpp - Code to perform CFG simplification ---------------===//
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00002//
John Criswell482202a2003-10-20 19:43:21 +00003// The LLVM Compiler Infrastructure
4//
Chris Lattnerf3ebc3f2007-12-29 20:36:04 +00005// This file is distributed under the University of Illinois Open Source
6// License. See LICENSE.TXT for details.
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00007//
John Criswell482202a2003-10-20 19:43:21 +00008//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00009//
Chris Lattnera704ac82002-10-08 21:36:33 +000010// Peephole optimize the CFG.
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000011//
12//===----------------------------------------------------------------------===//
13
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000014#include "llvm/ADT/APInt.h"
15#include "llvm/ADT/ArrayRef.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000016#include "llvm/ADT/DenseMap.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000017#include "llvm/ADT/Optional.h"
Chandler Carruth6bda14b2017-06-06 11:49:48 +000018#include "llvm/ADT/STLExtras.h"
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +000019#include "llvm/ADT/SetOperations.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000020#include "llvm/ADT/SetVector.h"
21#include "llvm/ADT/SmallPtrSet.h"
22#include "llvm/ADT/SmallVector.h"
23#include "llvm/ADT/Statistic.h"
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +000024#include "llvm/ADT/StringRef.h"
Peter Collingbourne0609acc2017-02-15 03:01:11 +000025#include "llvm/Analysis/AssumptionCache.h"
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +000026#include "llvm/Analysis/ConstantFolding.h"
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +000027#include "llvm/Analysis/EHPersonalities.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000028#include "llvm/Analysis/InstructionSimplify.h"
Chandler Carruthd3e73552013-01-07 03:08:10 +000029#include "llvm/Analysis/TargetTransformInfo.h"
David Blaikie31b98d22018-06-04 21:23:21 +000030#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/Local.h"
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000031#include "llvm/Analysis/ValueTracking.h"
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +000032#include "llvm/IR/Attributes.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000033#include "llvm/IR/BasicBlock.h"
Chandler Carruth1305dc32014-03-04 11:45:46 +000034#include "llvm/IR/CFG.h"
Chandler Carruth6bda14b2017-06-06 11:49:48 +000035#include "llvm/IR/CallSite.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000036#include "llvm/IR/Constant.h"
Chandler Carruth8cd041e2014-03-04 12:24:34 +000037#include "llvm/IR/ConstantRange.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000038#include "llvm/IR/Constants.h"
39#include "llvm/IR/DataLayout.h"
40#include "llvm/IR/DerivedTypes.h"
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +000041#include "llvm/IR/Function.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000042#include "llvm/IR/GlobalValue.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000043#include "llvm/IR/GlobalVariable.h"
44#include "llvm/IR/IRBuilder.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000045#include "llvm/IR/InstrTypes.h"
46#include "llvm/IR/Instruction.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000047#include "llvm/IR/Instructions.h"
48#include "llvm/IR/IntrinsicInst.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000049#include "llvm/IR/Intrinsics.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000050#include "llvm/IR/LLVMContext.h"
51#include "llvm/IR/MDBuilder.h"
52#include "llvm/IR/Metadata.h"
53#include "llvm/IR/Module.h"
Chandler Carruth64396b02014-03-04 12:05:47 +000054#include "llvm/IR/NoFolder.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000055#include "llvm/IR/Operator.h"
Chandler Carruth820a9082014-03-04 11:08:18 +000056#include "llvm/IR/PatternMatch.h"
Chandler Carruth9fb823b2013-01-02 11:36:10 +000057#include "llvm/IR/Type.h"
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +000058#include "llvm/IR/Use.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000059#include "llvm/IR/User.h"
60#include "llvm/IR/Value.h"
61#include "llvm/Support/Casting.h"
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +000062#include "llvm/Support/CommandLine.h"
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +000063#include "llvm/Support/Debug.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000064#include "llvm/Support/ErrorHandling.h"
Craig Topperb45eabc2017-04-26 16:39:58 +000065#include "llvm/Support/KnownBits.h"
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000066#include "llvm/Support/MathExtras.h"
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +000067#include "llvm/Support/raw_ostream.h"
Chandler Carruthaafe0912012-06-29 12:38:19 +000068#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/BasicBlockUtils.h"
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +000069#include "llvm/Transforms/Utils/ValueMapper.h"
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +000070#include <algorithm>
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000071#include <cassert>
72#include <climits>
73#include <cstddef>
74#include <cstdint>
75#include <iterator>
Chris Lattner5edb2f32004-10-18 04:07:22 +000076#include <map>
Chandler Carruthed0881b2012-12-03 16:50:05 +000077#include <set>
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +000078#include <tuple>
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +000079#include <utility>
80#include <vector>
81
Chris Lattnerdf3c3422004-01-09 06:12:26 +000082using namespace llvm;
Benjamin Kramer37172222013-07-04 14:22:02 +000083using namespace PatternMatch;
Brian Gaeke960707c2003-11-11 22:41:34 +000084
Chandler Carruth964daaa2014-04-22 02:55:47 +000085#define DEBUG_TYPE "simplifycfg"
86
James Molloy1b6207e2015-02-13 10:48:30 +000087// Chosen as 2 so as to be cheap, but still to have enough power to fold
88// a select, so the "clamp" idiom (of a min followed by a max) will be caught.
89// To catch this, we need to fold a compare and a select, hence '2' being the
90// minimum reasonable default.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +000091static cl::opt<unsigned> PHINodeFoldingThreshold(
92 "phi-node-folding-threshold", cl::Hidden, cl::init(2),
93 cl::desc(
94 "Control the amount of phi node folding to perform (default = 2)"));
95
96static cl::opt<bool> DupRet(
97 "simplifycfg-dup-ret", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
98 cl::desc("Duplicate return instructions into unconditional branches"));
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +000099
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +0000100static cl::opt<bool>
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000101 SinkCommon("simplifycfg-sink-common", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
102 cl::desc("Sink common instructions down to the end block"));
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +0000103
Alp Tokercb402912014-01-24 17:20:08 +0000104static cl::opt<bool> HoistCondStores(
105 "simplifycfg-hoist-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
106 cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores if an unconditional store precedes"));
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +0000107
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +0000108static cl::opt<bool> MergeCondStores(
109 "simplifycfg-merge-cond-stores", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
110 cl::desc("Hoist conditional stores even if an unconditional store does not "
111 "precede - hoist multiple conditional stores into a single "
112 "predicated store"));
113
114static cl::opt<bool> MergeCondStoresAggressively(
115 "simplifycfg-merge-cond-stores-aggressively", cl::Hidden, cl::init(false),
116 cl::desc("When merging conditional stores, do so even if the resultant "
117 "basic blocks are unlikely to be if-converted as a result"));
118
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000119static cl::opt<bool> SpeculateOneExpensiveInst(
120 "speculate-one-expensive-inst", cl::Hidden, cl::init(true),
121 cl::desc("Allow exactly one expensive instruction to be speculatively "
122 "executed"));
123
Sanjay Patel5264cc72016-01-27 19:22:45 +0000124static cl::opt<unsigned> MaxSpeculationDepth(
125 "max-speculation-depth", cl::Hidden, cl::init(10),
126 cl::desc("Limit maximum recursion depth when calculating costs of "
127 "speculatively executed instructions"));
128
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +0000129STATISTIC(NumBitMaps, "Number of switch instructions turned into bitmaps");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000130STATISTIC(NumLinearMaps,
131 "Number of switch instructions turned into linear mapping");
132STATISTIC(NumLookupTables,
133 "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables");
134STATISTIC(
135 NumLookupTablesHoles,
136 "Number of switch instructions turned into lookup tables (holes checked)");
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +0000137STATISTIC(NumTableCmpReuses, "Number of reused switch table lookup compares");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000138STATISTIC(NumSinkCommons,
139 "Number of common instructions sunk down to the end block");
Hans Wennborgcd3a11f2012-09-26 14:01:53 +0000140STATISTIC(NumSpeculations, "Number of speculative executed instructions");
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +0000141
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000142namespace {
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000143
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000144// The first field contains the value that the switch produces when a certain
145// case group is selected, and the second field is a vector containing the
146// cases composing the case group.
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +0000147using SwitchCaseResultVectorTy =
148 SmallVector<std::pair<Constant *, SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 4>>, 2>;
149
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000150// The first field contains the phi node that generates a result of the switch
151// and the second field contains the value generated for a certain case in the
152// switch for that PHI.
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +0000153using SwitchCaseResultsTy = SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4>;
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +0000154
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000155/// ValueEqualityComparisonCase - Represents a case of a switch.
156struct ValueEqualityComparisonCase {
157 ConstantInt *Value;
158 BasicBlock *Dest;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000159
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000160 ValueEqualityComparisonCase(ConstantInt *Value, BasicBlock *Dest)
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000161 : Value(Value), Dest(Dest) {}
162
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000163 bool operator<(ValueEqualityComparisonCase RHS) const {
164 // Comparing pointers is ok as we only rely on the order for uniquing.
165 return Value < RHS.Value;
166 }
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000167
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000168 bool operator==(BasicBlock *RHSDest) const { return Dest == RHSDest; }
169};
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000170
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000171class SimplifyCFGOpt {
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +0000172 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000173 const DataLayout &DL;
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +0000174 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders;
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +0000175 const SimplifyCFGOptions &Options;
176
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000177 Value *isValueEqualityComparison(TerminatorInst *TI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000178 BasicBlock *GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(
179 TerminatorInst *TI, std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000180 bool SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(TerminatorInst *TI,
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000181 BasicBlock *Pred,
182 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +0000183 bool FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(TerminatorInst *TI,
184 IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000185
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +0000186 bool SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Bill Wendlingd5d95b02012-02-06 21:16:41 +0000187 bool SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +0000188 bool SimplifySingleResume(ResumeInst *RI);
189 bool SimplifyCommonResume(ResumeInst *RI);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +0000190 bool SimplifyCleanupReturn(CleanupReturnInst *RI);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000191 bool SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI);
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000192 bool SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000193 bool SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000194 bool SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
195 bool SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +0000196
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000197public:
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000198 SimplifyCFGOpt(const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout &DL,
Joerg Sonnenbergerfa736742017-03-26 06:44:08 +0000199 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders,
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +0000200 const SimplifyCFGOptions &Opts)
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +0000201 : TTI(TTI), DL(DL), LoopHeaders(LoopHeaders), Options(Opts) {}
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000202
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000203 bool run(BasicBlock *BB);
204};
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000205
206} // end anonymous namespace
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000207
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000208/// Return true if it is safe to merge these two
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000209/// terminator instructions together.
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000210static bool
211SafeToMergeTerminators(TerminatorInst *SI1, TerminatorInst *SI2,
James Molloy21744682016-09-01 09:01:34 +0000212 SmallSetVector<BasicBlock *, 4> *FailBlocks = nullptr) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000213 if (SI1 == SI2)
214 return false; // Can't merge with self!
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000215
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000216 // It is not safe to merge these two switch instructions if they have a common
217 // successor, and if that successor has a PHI node, and if *that* PHI node has
218 // conflicting incoming values from the two switch blocks.
219 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
220 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
James Molloy3c1137c2016-08-31 13:32:28 +0000221
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000222 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
223 bool Fail = false;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000224 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(SI2BB))
225 if (SI1Succs.count(Succ))
226 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000227 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
228 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) !=
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000229 PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB)) {
230 if (FailBlocks)
231 FailBlocks->insert(Succ);
232 Fail = true;
233 }
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000234 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000235
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +0000236 return !Fail;
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000237}
238
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000239/// Return true if it is safe and profitable to merge these two terminator
240/// instructions together, where SI1 is an unconditional branch. PhiNodes will
241/// store all PHI nodes in common successors.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000242static bool
243isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BranchInst *SI1, BranchInst *SI2,
244 Instruction *Cond,
245 SmallVectorImpl<PHINode *> &PhiNodes) {
246 if (SI1 == SI2)
247 return false; // Can't merge with self!
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000248 assert(SI1->isUnconditional() && SI2->isConditional());
249
250 // We fold the unconditional branch if we can easily update all PHI nodes in
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000251 // common successors:
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000252 // 1> We have a constant incoming value for the conditional branch;
253 // 2> We have "Cond" as the incoming value for the unconditional branch;
254 // 3> SI2->getCondition() and Cond have same operands.
255 CmpInst *Ci2 = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(SI2->getCondition());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000256 if (!Ci2)
257 return false;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000258 if (!(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(0) &&
259 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(1)) &&
260 !(Cond->getOperand(0) == Ci2->getOperand(1) &&
261 Cond->getOperand(1) == Ci2->getOperand(0)))
262 return false;
263
264 BasicBlock *SI1BB = SI1->getParent();
265 BasicBlock *SI2BB = SI2->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000266 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> SI1Succs(succ_begin(SI1BB), succ_end(SI1BB));
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000267 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(SI2BB))
268 if (SI1Succs.count(Succ))
269 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000270 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
271 if (PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI1BB) != Cond ||
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +0000272 !isa<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(SI2BB)))
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +0000273 return false;
274 PhiNodes.push_back(PN);
275 }
276 return true;
277}
278
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000279/// Update PHI nodes in Succ to indicate that there will now be entries in it
280/// from the 'NewPred' block. The values that will be flowing into the PHI nodes
281/// will be the same as those coming in from ExistPred, an existing predecessor
282/// of Succ.
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000283static void AddPredecessorToBlock(BasicBlock *Succ, BasicBlock *NewPred,
284 BasicBlock *ExistPred) {
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +0000285 for (PHINode &PN : Succ->phis())
286 PN.addIncoming(PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(ExistPred), NewPred);
Chris Lattner76dc2042005-08-03 00:19:45 +0000287}
288
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000289/// Compute an abstract "cost" of speculating the given instruction,
290/// which is assumed to be safe to speculate. TCC_Free means cheap,
291/// TCC_Basic means less cheap, and TCC_Expensive means prohibitively
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000292/// expensive.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000293static unsigned ComputeSpeculationCost(const User *I,
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000294 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000295 assert(isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000296 "Instruction is not safe to speculatively execute!");
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +0000297 return TTI.getUserCost(I);
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +0000298}
Sanjay Patelf9b77632015-09-15 15:24:42 +0000299
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000300/// If we have a merge point of an "if condition" as accepted above,
301/// return true if the specified value dominates the block. We
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000302/// don't handle the true generality of domination here, just a special case
303/// which works well enough for us.
304///
305/// If AggressiveInsts is non-null, and if V does not dominate BB, we check to
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000306/// see if V (which must be an instruction) and its recursive operands
307/// that do not dominate BB have a combined cost lower than CostRemaining and
308/// are non-trapping. If both are true, the instruction is inserted into the
309/// set and true is returned.
310///
311/// The cost for most non-trapping instructions is defined as 1 except for
312/// Select whose cost is 2.
313///
314/// After this function returns, CostRemaining is decreased by the cost of
315/// V plus its non-dominating operands. If that cost is greater than
316/// CostRemaining, false is returned and CostRemaining is undefined.
Chris Lattner45c35b12004-10-14 05:13:36 +0000317static bool DominatesMergePoint(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000318 SmallPtrSetImpl<Instruction *> *AggressiveInsts,
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +0000319 unsigned &CostRemaining,
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000320 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
321 unsigned Depth = 0) {
Sanjay Patel5264cc72016-01-27 19:22:45 +0000322 // It is possible to hit a zero-cost cycle (phi/gep instructions for example),
323 // so limit the recursion depth.
324 // TODO: While this recursion limit does prevent pathological behavior, it
325 // would be better to track visited instructions to avoid cycles.
326 if (Depth == MaxSpeculationDepth)
327 return false;
328
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000329 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
Chris Lattnerb8b11592006-10-20 00:42:07 +0000330 if (!I) {
331 // Non-instructions all dominate instructions, but not all constantexprs
332 // can be executed unconditionally.
333 if (ConstantExpr *C = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
334 if (C->canTrap())
335 return false;
336 return true;
337 }
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000338 BasicBlock *PBB = I->getParent();
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000339
Chris Lattner0ce80cd2005-02-27 06:18:25 +0000340 // We don't want to allow weird loops that might have the "if condition" in
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000341 // the bottom of this block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000342 if (PBB == BB)
343 return false;
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000344
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000345 // If this instruction is defined in a block that contains an unconditional
346 // branch to BB, then it must be in the 'conditional' part of the "if
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000347 // statement". If not, it definitely dominates the region.
348 BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PBB->getTerminator());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000349 if (!BI || BI->isConditional() || BI->getSuccessor(0) != BB)
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000350 return true;
Eli Friedmanb8f6a4f2009-07-17 04:28:42 +0000351
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000352 // If we aren't allowing aggressive promotion anymore, then don't consider
353 // instructions in the 'if region'.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000354 if (!AggressiveInsts)
355 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000356
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000357 // If we have seen this instruction before, don't count it again.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000358 if (AggressiveInsts->count(I))
359 return true;
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000360
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000361 // Okay, it looks like the instruction IS in the "condition". Check to
362 // see if it's a cheap instruction to unconditionally compute, and if it
363 // only uses stuff defined outside of the condition. If so, hoist it out.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000364 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000365 return false;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000366
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000367 unsigned Cost = ComputeSpeculationCost(I, TTI);
Chris Lattner0aa56562004-04-09 22:50:22 +0000368
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000369 // Allow exactly one instruction to be speculated regardless of its cost
370 // (as long as it is safe to do so).
371 // This is intended to flatten the CFG even if the instruction is a division
372 // or other expensive operation. The speculation of an expensive instruction
373 // is expected to be undone in CodeGenPrepare if the speculation has not
374 // enabled further IR optimizations.
375 if (Cost > CostRemaining &&
376 (!SpeculateOneExpensiveInst || !AggressiveInsts->empty() || Depth > 0))
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000377 return false;
378
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000379 // Avoid unsigned wrap.
380 CostRemaining = (Cost > CostRemaining) ? 0 : CostRemaining - Cost;
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +0000381
382 // Okay, we can only really hoist these out if their operands do
383 // not take us over the cost threshold.
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000384 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end(); i != e; ++i)
David Majnemerfccf5c62016-01-27 02:59:41 +0000385 if (!DominatesMergePoint(*i, BB, AggressiveInsts, CostRemaining, TTI,
386 Depth + 1))
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +0000387 return false;
388 // Okay, it's safe to do this! Remember this instruction.
389 AggressiveInsts->insert(I);
Chris Lattner18d1f192004-02-11 03:36:04 +0000390 return true;
391}
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +0000392
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000393/// Extract ConstantInt from value, looking through IntToPtr
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000394/// and PointerNullValue. Return NULL if value is not a constant int.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000395static ConstantInt *GetConstantInt(Value *V, const DataLayout &DL) {
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000396 // Normal constant int.
397 ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(V);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000398 if (CI || !isa<Constant>(V) || !V->getType()->isPointerTy())
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000399 return CI;
400
401 // This is some kind of pointer constant. Turn it into a pointer-sized
402 // ConstantInt if possible.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000403 IntegerType *PtrTy = cast<IntegerType>(DL.getIntPtrType(V->getType()));
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000404
405 // Null pointer means 0, see SelectionDAGBuilder::getValue(const Value*).
406 if (isa<ConstantPointerNull>(V))
407 return ConstantInt::get(PtrTy, 0);
408
409 // IntToPtr const int.
410 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(V))
411 if (CE->getOpcode() == Instruction::IntToPtr)
412 if (ConstantInt *CI = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(CE->getOperand(0))) {
413 // The constant is very likely to have the right type already.
414 if (CI->getType() == PtrTy)
415 return CI;
416 else
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000417 return cast<ConstantInt>(
418 ConstantExpr::getIntegerCast(CI, PtrTy, /*isSigned=*/false));
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000419 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000420 return nullptr;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000421}
422
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000423namespace {
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000424
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000425/// Given a chain of or (||) or and (&&) comparison of a value against a
426/// constant, this will try to recover the information required for a switch
427/// structure.
428/// It will depth-first traverse the chain of comparison, seeking for patterns
429/// like %a == 12 or %a < 4 and combine them to produce a set of integer
430/// representing the different cases for the switch.
431/// Note that if the chain is composed of '||' it will build the set of elements
432/// that matches the comparisons (i.e. any of this value validate the chain)
433/// while for a chain of '&&' it will build the set elements that make the test
434/// fail.
435struct ConstantComparesGatherer {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000436 const DataLayout &DL;
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +0000437
438 /// Value found for the switch comparison
439 Value *CompValue = nullptr;
440
441 /// Extra clause to be checked before the switch
442 Value *Extra = nullptr;
443
444 /// Set of integers to match in switch
445 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 8> Vals;
446
447 /// Number of comparisons matched in the and/or chain
448 unsigned UsedICmps = 0;
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000449
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000450 /// Construct and compute the result for the comparison instruction Cond
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +0000451 ConstantComparesGatherer(Instruction *Cond, const DataLayout &DL) : DL(DL) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000452 gather(Cond);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000453 }
454
Aaron Ballmanf9a18972015-02-15 22:54:22 +0000455 ConstantComparesGatherer(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000456 ConstantComparesGatherer &
Aaron Ballmanf9a18972015-02-15 22:54:22 +0000457 operator=(const ConstantComparesGatherer &) = delete;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000458
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000459private:
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000460 /// Try to set the current value used for the comparison, it succeeds only if
461 /// it wasn't set before or if the new value is the same as the old one
462 bool setValueOnce(Value *NewVal) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000463 if (CompValue && CompValue != NewVal)
464 return false;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000465 CompValue = NewVal;
466 return (CompValue != nullptr);
467 }
468
469 /// Try to match Instruction "I" as a comparison against a constant and
470 /// populates the array Vals with the set of values that match (or do not
471 /// match depending on isEQ).
472 /// Return false on failure. On success, the Value the comparison matched
473 /// against is placed in CompValue.
474 /// If CompValue is already set, the function is expected to fail if a match
475 /// is found but the value compared to is different.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000476 bool matchInstruction(Instruction *I, bool isEQ) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000477 // If this is an icmp against a constant, handle this as one of the cases.
478 ICmpInst *ICI;
479 ConstantInt *C;
480 if (!((ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I)) &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000481 (C = GetConstantInt(I->getOperand(1), DL)))) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000482 return false;
483 }
484
485 Value *RHSVal;
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000486 const APInt *RHSC;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000487
488 // Pattern match a special case
David Majnemerc761afd2016-01-27 02:43:28 +0000489 // (x & ~2^z) == y --> x == y || x == y|2^z
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000490 // This undoes a transformation done by instcombine to fuse 2 compares.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000491 if (ICI->getPredicate() == (isEQ ? ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ : ICmpInst::ICMP_NE)) {
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000492 // It's a little bit hard to see why the following transformations are
493 // correct. Here is a CVC3 program to verify them for 64-bit values:
494
495 /*
496 ONE : BITVECTOR(64) = BVZEROEXTEND(0bin1, 63);
497 x : BITVECTOR(64);
498 y : BITVECTOR(64);
499 z : BITVECTOR(64);
500 mask : BITVECTOR(64) = BVSHL(ONE, z);
501 QUERY( (y & ~mask = y) =>
502 ((x & ~mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y | mask)))
503 );
Chuang-Yu Cheng68f7f1c2016-06-24 01:59:00 +0000504 QUERY( (y | mask = y) =>
505 ((x | mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y & ~mask)))
506 );
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000507 */
508
509 // Please note that each pattern must be a dual implication (<--> or
510 // iff). One directional implication can create spurious matches. If the
511 // implication is only one-way, an unsatisfiable condition on the left
512 // side can imply a satisfiable condition on the right side. Dual
513 // implication ensures that satisfiable conditions are transformed to
514 // other satisfiable conditions and unsatisfiable conditions are
515 // transformed to other unsatisfiable conditions.
516
517 // Here is a concrete example of a unsatisfiable condition on the left
518 // implying a satisfiable condition on the right:
519 //
520 // mask = (1 << z)
521 // (x & ~mask) == y --> (x == y || x == (y | mask))
522 //
523 // Substituting y = 3, z = 0 yields:
524 // (x & -2) == 3 --> (x == 3 || x == 2)
525
526 // Pattern match a special case:
527 /*
528 QUERY( (y & ~mask = y) =>
529 ((x & ~mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y | mask)))
530 );
531 */
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000532 if (match(ICI->getOperand(0),
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000533 m_And(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
534 APInt Mask = ~*RHSC;
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000535 if (Mask.isPowerOf2() && (C->getValue() & ~Mask) == C->getValue()) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000536 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000537 if (!setValueOnce(RHSVal))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000538 return false;
539
540 Vals.push_back(C);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000541 Vals.push_back(
Chuang-Yu Chengdbe00d52016-06-16 04:44:25 +0000542 ConstantInt::get(C->getContext(),
543 C->getValue() | Mask));
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000544 UsedICmps++;
545 return true;
546 }
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000547 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000548
Chuang-Yu Cheng68f7f1c2016-06-24 01:59:00 +0000549 // Pattern match a special case:
550 /*
551 QUERY( (y | mask = y) =>
552 ((x | mask = y) <=> (x = y OR x = (y & ~mask)))
553 );
554 */
555 if (match(ICI->getOperand(0),
556 m_Or(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
557 APInt Mask = *RHSC;
558 if (Mask.isPowerOf2() && (C->getValue() | Mask) == C->getValue()) {
559 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
560 if (!setValueOnce(RHSVal))
561 return false;
562
563 Vals.push_back(C);
564 Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(C->getContext(),
565 C->getValue() & ~Mask));
566 UsedICmps++;
567 return true;
568 }
569 }
570
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000571 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000572 if (!setValueOnce(ICI->getOperand(0)))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000573 return false;
574
575 UsedICmps++;
576 Vals.push_back(C);
577 return ICI->getOperand(0);
578 }
579
580 // If we have "x ult 3", for example, then we can add 0,1,2 to the set.
Sanjoy Das7182d362015-03-18 00:41:24 +0000581 ConstantRange Span = ConstantRange::makeAllowedICmpRegion(
582 ICI->getPredicate(), C->getValue());
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000583
584 // Shift the range if the compare is fed by an add. This is the range
585 // compare idiom as emitted by instcombine.
586 Value *CandidateVal = I->getOperand(0);
Chuang-Yu Cheng5078f942016-06-17 00:04:39 +0000587 if (match(I->getOperand(0), m_Add(m_Value(RHSVal), m_APInt(RHSC)))) {
588 Span = Span.subtract(*RHSC);
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000589 CandidateVal = RHSVal;
590 }
591
592 // If this is an and/!= check, then we are looking to build the set of
593 // value that *don't* pass the and chain. I.e. to turn "x ugt 2" into
594 // x != 0 && x != 1.
595 if (!isEQ)
596 Span = Span.inverse();
597
598 // If there are a ton of values, we don't want to make a ginormous switch.
Craig Topper7e3e7af2017-05-07 22:22:11 +0000599 if (Span.isSizeLargerThan(8) || Span.isEmptySet()) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000600 return false;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000601 }
602
603 // If we already have a value for the switch, it has to match!
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000604 if (!setValueOnce(CandidateVal))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000605 return false;
606
607 // Add all values from the range to the set
608 for (APInt Tmp = Span.getLower(); Tmp != Span.getUpper(); ++Tmp)
609 Vals.push_back(ConstantInt::get(I->getContext(), Tmp));
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000610
611 UsedICmps++;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000612 return true;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000613 }
614
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000615 /// Given a potentially 'or'd or 'and'd together collection of icmp
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000616 /// eq/ne/lt/gt instructions that compare a value against a constant, extract
617 /// the value being compared, and stick the list constants into the Vals
618 /// vector.
619 /// One "Extra" case is allowed to differ from the other.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000620 void gather(Value *V) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000621 Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V);
622 bool isEQ = (I->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000623
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000624 // Keep a stack (SmallVector for efficiency) for depth-first traversal
625 SmallVector<Value *, 8> DFT;
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000626 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Visited;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000627
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000628 // Initialize
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000629 Visited.insert(V);
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000630 DFT.push_back(V);
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000631
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000632 while (!DFT.empty()) {
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000633 V = DFT.pop_back_val();
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000634
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000635 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(V)) {
636 // If it is a || (or && depending on isEQ), process the operands.
637 if (I->getOpcode() == (isEQ ? Instruction::Or : Instruction::And)) {
Gerolf Hoflehner2432bd02016-02-03 23:54:25 +0000638 if (Visited.insert(I->getOperand(1)).second)
639 DFT.push_back(I->getOperand(1));
640 if (Visited.insert(I->getOperand(0)).second)
641 DFT.push_back(I->getOperand(0));
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000642 continue;
643 }
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000644
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000645 // Try to match the current instruction
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000646 if (matchInstruction(I, isEQ))
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000647 // Match succeed, continue the loop
648 continue;
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +0000649 }
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000650
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000651 // One element of the sequence of || (or &&) could not be match as a
652 // comparison against the same value as the others.
653 // We allow only one "Extra" case to be checked before the switch
654 if (!Extra) {
655 Extra = V;
Timur Iskhodzhanov71526a32014-11-20 12:36:43 +0000656 continue;
657 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000658 // Failed to parse a proper sequence, abort now
659 CompValue = nullptr;
660 break;
Chris Lattner5a177e62010-12-13 04:26:26 +0000661 }
Anton Korobeynikov1bfd1212008-02-20 11:26:25 +0000662 }
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +0000663};
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000664
665} // end anonymous namespace
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +0000666
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000667static void EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TerminatorInst *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000668 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000669 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
670 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(SI->getCondition());
671 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
672 if (BI->isConditional())
673 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +0000674 } else if (IndirectBrInst *IBI = dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(TI)) {
675 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(IBI->getAddress());
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000676 }
677
678 TI->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000679 if (Cond)
680 RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(Cond);
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +0000681}
682
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000683/// Return true if the specified terminator checks
Chris Lattner8e84c122008-11-27 23:25:44 +0000684/// to see if a value is equal to constant integer value.
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000685Value *SimplifyCFGOpt::isValueEqualityComparison(TerminatorInst *TI) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000686 Value *CV = nullptr;
Chris Lattnera64923a2004-03-16 19:45:22 +0000687 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
688 // Do not permit merging of large switch instructions into their
689 // predecessors unless there is only one predecessor.
Vedant Kumare0b5f862018-05-10 23:01:54 +0000690 if (SI->getNumSuccessors() * pred_size(SI->getParent()) <= 128)
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000691 CV = SI->getCondition();
692 } else if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI))
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000693 if (BI->isConditional() && BI->getCondition()->hasOneUse())
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000694 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition())) {
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +0000695 if (ICI->isEquality() && GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), DL))
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000696 CV = ICI->getOperand(0);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000697 }
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000698
699 // Unwrap any lossless ptrtoint cast.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000700 if (CV) {
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000701 if (PtrToIntInst *PTII = dyn_cast<PtrToIntInst>(CV)) {
702 Value *Ptr = PTII->getPointerOperand();
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +0000703 if (PTII->getType() == DL.getIntPtrType(Ptr->getType()))
Matt Arsenaultfa646592013-10-21 18:55:08 +0000704 CV = Ptr;
705 }
706 }
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +0000707 return CV;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000708}
709
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000710/// Given a value comparison instruction,
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +0000711/// decode all of the 'cases' that it represents and return the 'default' block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000712BasicBlock *SimplifyCFGOpt::GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(
713 TerminatorInst *TI, std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000714 if (SwitchInst *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000715 Cases.reserve(SI->getNumCases());
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +0000716 for (auto Case : SI->cases())
717 Cases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(Case.getCaseValue(),
718 Case.getCaseSuccessor()));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000719 return SI->getDefaultDest();
720 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000721
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000722 BranchInst *BI = cast<BranchInst>(TI);
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000723 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000724 BasicBlock *Succ = BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_NE);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000725 Cases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(
726 GetConstantInt(ICI->getOperand(1), DL), Succ));
Reid Spencer266e42b2006-12-23 06:05:41 +0000727 return BI->getSuccessor(ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +0000728}
729
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000730/// Given a vector of bb/value pairs, remove any entries
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000731/// in the list that match the specified block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000732static void
733EliminateBlockCases(BasicBlock *BB,
734 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &Cases) {
Benjamin Kramerc5b06782012-10-14 11:15:42 +0000735 Cases.erase(std::remove(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), BB), Cases.end());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000736}
737
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000738/// Return true if there are any keys in C1 that exist in C2 as well.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000739static bool ValuesOverlap(std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C1,
740 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> &C2) {
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000741 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> *V1 = &C1, *V2 = &C2;
742
743 // Make V1 be smaller than V2.
744 if (V1->size() > V2->size())
745 std::swap(V1, V2);
746
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000747 if (V1->empty())
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000748 return false;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000749 if (V1->size() == 1) {
750 // Just scan V2.
751 ConstantInt *TheVal = (*V1)[0].Value;
752 for (unsigned i = 0, e = V2->size(); i != e; ++i)
753 if (TheVal == (*V2)[i].Value)
754 return true;
755 }
756
757 // Otherwise, just sort both lists and compare element by element.
758 array_pod_sort(V1->begin(), V1->end());
759 array_pod_sort(V2->begin(), V2->end());
760 unsigned i1 = 0, i2 = 0, e1 = V1->size(), e2 = V2->size();
761 while (i1 != e1 && i2 != e2) {
762 if ((*V1)[i1].Value == (*V2)[i2].Value)
763 return true;
764 if ((*V1)[i1].Value < (*V2)[i2].Value)
765 ++i1;
766 else
767 ++i2;
768 }
769 return false;
770}
771
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +0000772// Set branch weights on SwitchInst. This sets the metadata if there is at
773// least one non-zero weight.
774static void setBranchWeights(SwitchInst *SI, ArrayRef<uint32_t> Weights) {
775 // Check that there is at least one non-zero weight. Otherwise, pass
776 // nullptr to setMetadata which will erase the existing metadata.
777 MDNode *N = nullptr;
778 if (llvm::any_of(Weights, [](uint32_t W) { return W != 0; }))
779 N = MDBuilder(SI->getParent()->getContext()).createBranchWeights(Weights);
780 SI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, N);
781}
782
783// Similar to the above, but for branch and select instructions that take
784// exactly 2 weights.
785static void setBranchWeights(Instruction *I, uint32_t TrueWeight,
786 uint32_t FalseWeight) {
787 assert(isa<BranchInst>(I) || isa<SelectInst>(I));
788 // Check that there is at least one non-zero weight. Otherwise, pass
789 // nullptr to setMetadata which will erase the existing metadata.
790 MDNode *N = nullptr;
791 if (TrueWeight || FalseWeight)
792 N = MDBuilder(I->getParent()->getContext())
793 .createBranchWeights(TrueWeight, FalseWeight);
794 I->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, N);
795}
796
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +0000797/// If TI is known to be a terminator instruction and its block is known to
798/// only have a single predecessor block, check to see if that predecessor is
799/// also a value comparison with the same value, and if that comparison
800/// determines the outcome of this comparison. If so, simplify TI. This does a
801/// very limited form of jump threading.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000802bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(
803 TerminatorInst *TI, BasicBlock *Pred, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000804 Value *PredVal = isValueEqualityComparison(Pred->getTerminator());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000805 if (!PredVal)
806 return false; // Not a value comparison in predecessor.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000807
808 Value *ThisVal = isValueEqualityComparison(TI);
809 assert(ThisVal && "This isn't a value comparison!!");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000810 if (ThisVal != PredVal)
811 return false; // Different predicates.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000812
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000813 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
814 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
815
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000816 // Find out information about when control will move from Pred to TI's block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000817 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000818 BasicBlock *PredDef =
819 GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(Pred->getTerminator(), PredCases);
820 EliminateBlockCases(PredDef, PredCases); // Remove default from cases.
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +0000821
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000822 // Find information about how control leaves this block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000823 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> ThisCases;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000824 BasicBlock *ThisDef = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, ThisCases);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000825 EliminateBlockCases(ThisDef, ThisCases); // Remove default from cases.
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000826
827 // If TI's block is the default block from Pred's comparison, potentially
828 // simplify TI based on this knowledge.
829 if (PredDef == TI->getParent()) {
830 // If we are here, we know that the value is none of those cases listed in
831 // PredCases. If there are any cases in ThisCases that are in PredCases, we
832 // can simplify TI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000833 if (!ValuesOverlap(PredCases, ThisCases))
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000834 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000835
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000836 if (isa<BranchInst>(TI)) {
837 // Okay, one of the successors of this condbr is dead. Convert it to a
838 // uncond br.
839 assert(ThisCases.size() == 1 && "Branch can only have one case!");
840 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000841 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(ThisDef);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000842 (void)NI;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000843
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000844 // Remove PHI node entries for the dead edge.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000845 ThisCases[0].Dest->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000846
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +0000847 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
848 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI
849 << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000850
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000851 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TI);
852 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000853 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000854
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000855 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(TI);
856 // Okay, TI has cases that are statically dead, prune them away.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000857 SmallPtrSet<Constant *, 16> DeadCases;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000858 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
859 DeadCases.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000860
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +0000861 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
862 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI);
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000863
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000864 // Collect branch weights into a vector.
865 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> Weights;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000866 MDNode *MD = SI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000867 bool HasWeight = MD && (MD->getNumOperands() == 2 + SI->getNumCases());
868 if (HasWeight)
869 for (unsigned MD_i = 1, MD_e = MD->getNumOperands(); MD_i < MD_e;
870 ++MD_i) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +0000871 ConstantInt *CI = mdconst::extract<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(MD_i));
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000872 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
873 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000874 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt i = SI->case_end(), e = SI->case_begin(); i != e;) {
875 --i;
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +0000876 if (DeadCases.count(i->getCaseValue())) {
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000877 if (HasWeight) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +0000878 std::swap(Weights[i->getCaseIndex() + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Ren8691e522012-09-14 21:53:06 +0000879 Weights.pop_back();
880 }
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +0000881 i->getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(TI->getParent());
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000882 SI->removeCase(i);
883 }
884 }
Manman Ren97c18762012-10-11 22:28:34 +0000885 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2)
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +0000886 setBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000887
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +0000888 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Leaving: " << *TI << "\n");
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000889 return true;
890 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +0000891
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000892 // Otherwise, TI's block must correspond to some matched value. Find out
893 // which value (or set of values) this is.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000894 ConstantInt *TIV = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000895 BasicBlock *TIBB = TI->getParent();
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000896 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
897 if (PredCases[i].Dest == TIBB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000898 if (TIV)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000899 return false; // Cannot handle multiple values coming to this block.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000900 TIV = PredCases[i].Value;
901 }
902 assert(TIV && "No edge from pred to succ?");
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000903
904 // Okay, we found the one constant that our value can be if we get into TI's
905 // BB. Find out which successor will unconditionally be branched to.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000906 BasicBlock *TheRealDest = nullptr;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +0000907 for (unsigned i = 0, e = ThisCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
908 if (ThisCases[i].Value == TIV) {
909 TheRealDest = ThisCases[i].Dest;
910 break;
911 }
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000912
913 // If not handled by any explicit cases, it is handled by the default case.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000914 if (!TheRealDest)
915 TheRealDest = ThisDef;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000916
917 // Remove PHI node entries for dead edges.
918 BasicBlock *CheckEdge = TheRealDest;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +0000919 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(TIBB))
920 if (Succ != CheckEdge)
921 Succ->removePredecessor(TIBB);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000922 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +0000923 CheckEdge = nullptr;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000924
925 // Insert the new branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +0000926 Instruction *NI = Builder.CreateBr(TheRealDest);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000927 (void)NI;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000928
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +0000929 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Threading pred instr: " << *Pred->getTerminator()
930 << "Through successor TI: " << *TI << "Leaving: " << *NI
931 << "\n");
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +0000932
933 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(TI);
934 return true;
Chris Lattner1cca9592005-02-24 06:17:52 +0000935}
936
Dale Johannesen7f99d222009-03-12 21:01:11 +0000937namespace {
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000938
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000939/// This class implements a stable ordering of constant
940/// integers that does not depend on their address. This is important for
941/// applications that sort ConstantInt's to ensure uniqueness.
942struct ConstantIntOrdering {
943 bool operator()(const ConstantInt *LHS, const ConstantInt *RHS) const {
944 return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue());
945 }
946};
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +0000947
948} // end anonymous namespace
Dale Johannesen5a41b2d2009-03-12 01:00:26 +0000949
Benjamin Kramer8817cca2013-09-22 14:09:50 +0000950static int ConstantIntSortPredicate(ConstantInt *const *P1,
951 ConstantInt *const *P2) {
952 const ConstantInt *LHS = *P1;
953 const ConstantInt *RHS = *P2;
Benjamin Kramer7d537ae2016-02-20 10:40:42 +0000954 if (LHS == RHS)
Chris Lattnere893e262010-12-15 04:52:41 +0000955 return 0;
Benjamin Kramer7d537ae2016-02-20 10:40:42 +0000956 return LHS->getValue().ult(RHS->getValue()) ? 1 : -1;
Chris Lattner7c8e6042010-12-13 02:00:58 +0000957}
958
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000959static inline bool HasBranchWeights(const Instruction *I) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000960 MDNode *ProfMD = I->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000961 if (ProfMD && ProfMD->getOperand(0))
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000962 if (MDString *MDS = dyn_cast<MDString>(ProfMD->getOperand(0)))
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000963 return MDS->getString().equals("branch_weights");
964
965 return false;
966}
967
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000968/// Get Weights of a given TerminatorInst, the default weight is at the front
969/// of the vector. If TI is a conditional eq, we need to swap the branch-weight
970/// metadata.
971static void GetBranchWeights(TerminatorInst *TI,
972 SmallVectorImpl<uint64_t> &Weights) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithde36e802014-11-11 21:30:22 +0000973 MDNode *MD = TI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof);
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000974 assert(MD);
975 for (unsigned i = 1, e = MD->getNumOperands(); i < e; ++i) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5bf8fef2014-12-09 18:38:53 +0000976 ConstantInt *CI = mdconst::extract<ConstantInt>(MD->getOperand(i));
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000977 Weights.push_back(CI->getValue().getZExtValue());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000978 }
979
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000980 // If TI is a conditional eq, the default case is the false case,
981 // and the corresponding branch-weight data is at index 2. We swap the
982 // default weight to be the first entry.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +0000983 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +0000984 assert(Weights.size() == 2);
985 ICmpInst *ICI = cast<ICmpInst>(BI->getCondition());
986 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
987 std::swap(Weights.front(), Weights.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000988 }
989}
990
Sanjay Patel84a0bf62016-05-06 17:51:37 +0000991/// Keep halving the weights until all can fit in uint32_t.
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000992static void FitWeights(MutableArrayRef<uint64_t> Weights) {
Benjamin Kramer79da9412014-03-09 14:42:55 +0000993 uint64_t Max = *std::max_element(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
994 if (Max > UINT_MAX) {
995 unsigned Offset = 32 - countLeadingZeros(Max);
996 for (uint64_t &I : Weights)
997 I >>= Offset;
Manman Renf1cb16e2014-01-27 23:39:03 +0000998 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +0000999}
1000
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001001/// The specified terminator is a value equality comparison instruction
1002/// (either a switch or a branch on "X == c").
Bill Wendlingcaf1d222009-01-19 23:43:56 +00001003/// See if any of the predecessors of the terminator block are value comparisons
1004/// on the same value. If so, and if safe to do so, fold them together.
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00001005bool SimplifyCFGOpt::FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(TerminatorInst *TI,
1006 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001007 BasicBlock *BB = TI->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001008 Value *CV = isValueEqualityComparison(TI); // CondVal
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001009 assert(CV && "Not a comparison?");
1010 bool Changed = false;
1011
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001012 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 16> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001013 while (!Preds.empty()) {
Dan Gohman9a6fef02009-05-06 17:22:41 +00001014 BasicBlock *Pred = Preds.pop_back_val();
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001015
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001016 // See if the predecessor is a comparison with the same value.
1017 TerminatorInst *PTI = Pred->getTerminator();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001018 Value *PCV = isValueEqualityComparison(PTI); // PredCondVal
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001019
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +00001020 if (PCV == CV && TI != PTI) {
James Molloy21744682016-09-01 09:01:34 +00001021 SmallSetVector<BasicBlock*, 4> FailBlocks;
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +00001022 if (!SafeToMergeTerminators(TI, PTI, &FailBlocks)) {
1023 for (auto *Succ : FailBlocks) {
Benjamin Kramer46f5e2c2017-03-24 14:15:35 +00001024 if (!SplitBlockPredecessors(Succ, TI->getParent(), ".fold.split"))
James Molloye6566422016-09-01 07:45:25 +00001025 return false;
1026 }
1027 }
1028
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001029 // Figure out which 'cases' to copy from SI to PSI.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001030 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> BBCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001031 BasicBlock *BBDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(TI, BBCases);
1032
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001033 std::vector<ValueEqualityComparisonCase> PredCases;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001034 BasicBlock *PredDefault = GetValueEqualityComparisonCases(PTI, PredCases);
1035
1036 // Based on whether the default edge from PTI goes to BB or not, fill in
1037 // PredCases and PredDefault with the new switch cases we would like to
1038 // build.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001039 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> NewSuccessors;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001040
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001041 // Update the branch weight metadata along the way
1042 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001043 bool PredHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(PTI);
1044 bool SuccHasWeights = HasBranchWeights(TI);
1045
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001046 if (PredHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001047 GetBranchWeights(PTI, Weights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +00001048 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001049 if (Weights.size() != 1 + PredCases.size())
1050 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
1051 } else if (SuccHasWeights)
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001052 // If there are no predecessor weights but there are successor weights,
1053 // populate Weights with 1, which will later be scaled to the sum of
1054 // successor's weights
1055 Weights.assign(1 + PredCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001056
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001057 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> SuccWeights;
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001058 if (SuccHasWeights) {
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001059 GetBranchWeights(TI, SuccWeights);
Andrew Trick7656f6d2012-11-15 18:40:31 +00001060 // branch-weight metadata is inconsistent here.
Manman Ren5e5049d2012-09-14 19:05:19 +00001061 if (SuccWeights.size() != 1 + BBCases.size())
1062 PredHasWeights = SuccHasWeights = false;
1063 } else if (PredHasWeights)
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001064 SuccWeights.assign(1 + BBCases.size(), 1);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001065
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001066 if (PredDefault == BB) {
1067 // If this is the default destination from PTI, only the edges in TI
1068 // that don't occur in PTI, or that branch to BB will be activated.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001069 std::set<ConstantInt *, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001070 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1071 if (PredCases[i].Dest != BB)
1072 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
1073 else {
1074 // The default destination is BB, we don't need explicit targets.
1075 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001076
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001077 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
1078 // Increase weight for the default case.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001079 Weights[0] += Weights[i + 1];
1080 std::swap(Weights[i + 1], Weights.back());
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001081 Weights.pop_back();
1082 }
1083
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001084 PredCases.pop_back();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001085 --i;
1086 --e;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001087 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001088
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001089 // Reconstruct the new switch statement we will be building.
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001090 if (PredDefault != BBDefault) {
1091 PredDefault->removePredecessor(Pred);
1092 PredDefault = BBDefault;
1093 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
1094 }
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001095
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001096 unsigned CasesFromPred = Weights.size();
1097 uint64_t ValidTotalSuccWeight = 0;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001098 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1099 if (!PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value) &&
1100 BBCases[i].Dest != BBDefault) {
1101 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
1102 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001103 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
1104 // The default weight is at index 0, so weight for the ith case
1105 // should be at index i+1. Scale the cases from successor by
1106 // PredDefaultWeight (Weights[0]).
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001107 Weights.push_back(Weights[0] * SuccWeights[i + 1]);
1108 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[i + 1];
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001109 }
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001110 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001111
Manman Ren571d9e42012-09-11 17:43:35 +00001112 if (SuccHasWeights || PredHasWeights) {
1113 ValidTotalSuccWeight += SuccWeights[0];
1114 // Scale the cases from predecessor by ValidTotalSuccWeight.
1115 for (unsigned i = 1; i < CasesFromPred; ++i)
1116 Weights[i] *= ValidTotalSuccWeight;
1117 // Scale the default weight by SuccDefaultWeight (SuccWeights[0]).
1118 Weights[0] *= SuccWeights[0];
1119 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001120 } else {
1121 // If this is not the default destination from PSI, only the edges
1122 // in SI that occur in PSI with a destination of BB will be
1123 // activated.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001124 std::set<ConstantInt *, ConstantIntOrdering> PTIHandled;
1125 std::map<ConstantInt *, uint64_t> WeightsForHandled;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001126 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1127 if (PredCases[i].Dest == BB) {
1128 PTIHandled.insert(PredCases[i].Value);
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001129
1130 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001131 WeightsForHandled[PredCases[i].Value] = Weights[i + 1];
1132 std::swap(Weights[i + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001133 Weights.pop_back();
1134 }
1135
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001136 std::swap(PredCases[i], PredCases.back());
1137 PredCases.pop_back();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001138 --i;
1139 --e;
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001140 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001141
1142 // Okay, now we know which constants were sent to BB from the
1143 // predecessor. Figure out where they will all go now.
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001144 for (unsigned i = 0, e = BBCases.size(); i != e; ++i)
1145 if (PTIHandled.count(BBCases[i].Value)) {
1146 // If this is one we are capable of getting...
Manman Rend81b8e82012-09-14 17:29:56 +00001147 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
1148 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[BBCases[i].Value]);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001149 PredCases.push_back(BBCases[i]);
1150 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBCases[i].Dest);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001151 PTIHandled.erase(
1152 BBCases[i].Value); // This constant is taken care of
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001153 }
1154
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001155 // If there are any constants vectored to BB that TI doesn't handle,
1156 // they must go to the default destination of TI.
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00001157 for (ConstantInt *I : PTIHandled) {
Andrew Trick90f50292012-11-15 18:40:29 +00001158 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights)
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00001159 Weights.push_back(WeightsForHandled[I]);
1160 PredCases.push_back(ValueEqualityComparisonCase(I, BBDefault));
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001161 NewSuccessors.push_back(BBDefault);
Eric Christopherb65acc62012-07-02 23:22:21 +00001162 }
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001163 }
1164
1165 // Okay, at this point, we know which new successor Pred will get. Make
1166 // sure we update the number of entries in the PHI nodes for these
1167 // successors.
Sanjay Patelf4b34b72015-09-10 16:25:38 +00001168 for (BasicBlock *NewSuccessor : NewSuccessors)
1169 AddPredecessorToBlock(NewSuccessor, Pred, BB);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001170
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00001171 Builder.SetInsertPoint(PTI);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00001172 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
Duncan Sands19d0b472010-02-16 11:11:14 +00001173 if (CV->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001174 CV = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(CV, DL.getIntPtrType(CV->getType()),
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00001175 "magicptr");
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00001176 }
1177
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001178 // Now that the successors are updated, create the new Switch instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001179 SwitchInst *NewSI =
1180 Builder.CreateSwitch(CV, PredDefault, PredCases.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +00001181 NewSI->setDebugLoc(PTI->getDebugLoc());
Sanjay Patel5e7bd912015-09-10 16:15:21 +00001182 for (ValueEqualityComparisonCase &V : PredCases)
1183 NewSI->addCase(V.Value, V.Dest);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +00001184
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001185 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
1186 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
1187 FitWeights(Weights);
1188
1189 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
1190
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00001191 setBranchWeights(NewSI, MDWeights);
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00001192 }
1193
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001194 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(PTI);
Chris Lattner3215bb62005-01-01 16:02:12 +00001195
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001196 // Okay, last check. If BB is still a successor of PSI, then we must
1197 // have an infinite loop case. If so, add an infinitely looping block
1198 // to handle the case to preserve the behavior of the code.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001199 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001200 for (unsigned i = 0, e = NewSI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
1201 if (NewSI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001202 if (!InfLoopBlock) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00001203 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001204 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001205 InfLoopBlock = BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "infloop",
1206 BB->getParent());
Gabor Greife9ecc682008-04-06 20:25:17 +00001207 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001208 }
1209 NewSI->setSuccessor(i, InfLoopBlock);
1210 }
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001211
Chris Lattnerd3e6ae22004-02-28 21:28:10 +00001212 Changed = true;
1213 }
1214 }
1215 return Changed;
1216}
1217
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001218// If we would need to insert a select that uses the value of this invoke
1219// (comments in HoistThenElseCodeToIf explain why we would need to do this), we
1220// can't hoist the invoke, as there is nowhere to put the select in this case.
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001221static bool isSafeToHoistInvoke(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2,
1222 Instruction *I1, Instruction *I2) {
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001223 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00001224 for (const PHINode &PN : Succ->phis()) {
1225 Value *BB1V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1226 Value *BB2V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001227 if (BB1V != BB2V && (BB1V == I1 || BB2V == I2)) {
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001228 return false;
1229 }
1230 }
1231 }
1232 return true;
1233}
1234
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001235static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I);
1236
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00001237/// Given a conditional branch that goes to BB1 and BB2, hoist any common code
1238/// in the two blocks up into the branch block. The caller of this function
1239/// guarantees that BI's block dominates BB1 and BB2.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001240static bool HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BranchInst *BI,
Chad Rosier54390052015-02-23 19:15:16 +00001241 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001242 // This does very trivial matching, with limited scanning, to find identical
1243 // instructions in the two blocks. In particular, we don't want to get into
1244 // O(M*N) situations here where M and N are the sizes of BB1 and BB2. As
1245 // such, we currently just scan for obviously identical instructions in an
1246 // identical order.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001247 BasicBlock *BB1 = BI->getSuccessor(0); // The true destination.
1248 BasicBlock *BB2 = BI->getSuccessor(1); // The false destination
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001249
Devang Patelf10e2872009-02-04 00:03:08 +00001250 BasicBlock::iterator BB1_Itr = BB1->begin();
1251 BasicBlock::iterator BB2_Itr = BB2->begin();
1252
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001253 Instruction *I1 = &*BB1_Itr++, *I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Ulrich Weigand019dd232018-03-09 22:00:10 +00001254 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1255 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1256 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1257 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1258 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
1259 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
1260 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
1261 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
1262 }
1263 if (isa<PHINode>(I1) || !I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2) ||
1264 (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2)))
1265 return false;
1266
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001267 BasicBlock *BIParent = BI->getParent();
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001268
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001269 bool Changed = false;
Ulrich Weigand019dd232018-03-09 22:00:10 +00001270 do {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001271 // If we are hoisting the terminator instruction, don't move one (making a
1272 // broken BB), instead clone it, and remove BI.
Chandler Carruth9ae926b2018-08-26 09:51:22 +00001273 if (I1->isTerminator())
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001274 goto HoistTerminator;
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001275
Davide Italiano9f074fe2017-12-31 16:47:16 +00001276 // If we're going to hoist a call, make sure that the two instructions we're
1277 // commoning/hoisting are both marked with musttail, or neither of them is
1278 // marked as such. Otherwise, we might end up in a situation where we hoist
1279 // from a block where the terminator is a `ret` to a block where the terminator
1280 // is a `br`, and `musttail` calls expect to be followed by a return.
1281 auto *C1 = dyn_cast<CallInst>(I1);
1282 auto *C2 = dyn_cast<CallInst>(I2);
1283 if (C1 && C2)
1284 if (C1->isMustTailCall() != C2->isMustTailCall())
Davide Italiano86b79492017-12-31 16:54:03 +00001285 return Changed;
Davide Italiano9f074fe2017-12-31 16:47:16 +00001286
Chad Rosier54390052015-02-23 19:15:16 +00001287 if (!TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I1) || !TTI.isProfitableToHoist(I2))
1288 return Changed;
1289
Ulrich Weigandf4ceef82018-03-15 12:28:48 +00001290 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1) || isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2)) {
1291 assert (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1) && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2));
1292 // The debug location is an integral part of a debug info intrinsic
1293 // and can't be separated from it or replaced. Instead of attempting
1294 // to merge locations, simply hoist both copies of the intrinsic.
1295 BIParent->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(),
1296 BB1->getInstList(), I1);
1297 BIParent->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(),
1298 BB2->getInstList(), I2);
1299 Changed = true;
1300 } else {
1301 // For a normal instruction, we just move one to right before the branch,
1302 // then replace all uses of the other with the first. Finally, we remove
1303 // the now redundant second instruction.
1304 BIParent->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(),
1305 BB1->getInstList(), I1);
1306 if (!I2->use_empty())
1307 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(I1);
1308 I1->andIRFlags(I2);
1309 unsigned KnownIDs[] = {LLVMContext::MD_tbaa,
1310 LLVMContext::MD_range,
1311 LLVMContext::MD_fpmath,
1312 LLVMContext::MD_invariant_load,
1313 LLVMContext::MD_nonnull,
1314 LLVMContext::MD_invariant_group,
1315 LLVMContext::MD_align,
1316 LLVMContext::MD_dereferenceable,
1317 LLVMContext::MD_dereferenceable_or_null,
1318 LLVMContext::MD_mem_parallel_loop_access};
Florian Hahn406f1ff2018-08-24 11:40:04 +00001319 combineMetadata(I1, I2, KnownIDs, true);
Dehao Chen87823f82016-09-08 21:53:33 +00001320
Ulrich Weigandf4ceef82018-03-15 12:28:48 +00001321 // I1 and I2 are being combined into a single instruction. Its debug
1322 // location is the merged locations of the original instructions.
1323 I1->applyMergedLocation(I1->getDebugLoc(), I2->getDebugLoc());
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001324
Ulrich Weigandf4ceef82018-03-15 12:28:48 +00001325 I2->eraseFromParent();
1326 Changed = true;
1327 }
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001328
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001329 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
1330 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
Ulrich Weigand019dd232018-03-09 22:00:10 +00001331 // Skip debug info if it is not identical.
1332 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI1 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1);
1333 DbgInfoIntrinsic *DBI2 = dyn_cast<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2);
1334 if (!DBI1 || !DBI2 || !DBI1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(DBI2)) {
1335 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I1))
1336 I1 = &*BB1_Itr++;
1337 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I2))
1338 I2 = &*BB2_Itr++;
1339 }
1340 } while (I1->isIdenticalToWhenDefined(I2));
1341
1342 return true;
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001343
1344HoistTerminator:
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001345 // It may not be possible to hoist an invoke.
1346 if (isa<InvokeInst>(I1) && !isSafeToHoistInvoke(BB1, BB2, I1, I2))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001347 return Changed;
1348
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001349 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00001350 for (PHINode &PN : Succ->phis()) {
1351 Value *BB1V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1352 Value *BB2V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001353 if (BB1V == BB2V)
1354 continue;
1355
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001356 // Check for passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined here because we would rather
1357 // eliminate undefined control flow then converting it to a select.
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00001358 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB1V, &PN) ||
1359 passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(BB2V, &PN))
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001360 return Changed;
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00001361
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001362 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB1V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB1V))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001363 return Changed;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001364 if (isa<ConstantExpr>(BB2V) && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(BB2V))
David Majnemerc82f27a2013-06-03 20:43:12 +00001365 return Changed;
1366 }
1367 }
Dale Johannesen9df78ee2009-06-15 20:59:27 +00001368
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001369 // Okay, it is safe to hoist the terminator.
Nick Lewycky42fb7452009-09-27 07:38:41 +00001370 Instruction *NT = I1->clone();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001371 BIParent->getInstList().insert(BI->getIterator(), NT);
Benjamin Kramerccce8ba2010-01-05 13:12:22 +00001372 if (!NT->getType()->isVoidTy()) {
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001373 I1->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
1374 I2->replaceAllUsesWith(NT);
Chris Lattner8dd4cae2007-02-11 01:37:51 +00001375 NT->takeName(I1);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001376 }
1377
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00001378 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(NT);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001379 // Hoisting one of the terminators from our successor is a great thing.
1380 // Unfortunately, the successors of the if/else blocks may have PHI nodes in
1381 // them. If they do, all PHI entries for BB1/BB2 must agree for all PHI
1382 // nodes, so we insert select instruction to compute the final result.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001383 std::map<std::pair<Value *, Value *>, SelectInst *> InsertedSelects;
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001384 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1)) {
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00001385 for (PHINode &PN : Succ->phis()) {
1386 Value *BB1V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB1);
1387 Value *BB2V = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB2);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001388 if (BB1V == BB2V)
1389 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00001390
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001391 // These values do not agree. Insert a select instruction before NT
1392 // that determines the right value.
1393 SelectInst *&SI = InsertedSelects[std::make_pair(BB1V, BB2V)];
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001394 if (!SI)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001395 SI = cast<SelectInst>(
1396 Builder.CreateSelect(BI->getCondition(), BB1V, BB2V,
1397 BB1V->getName() + "." + BB2V->getName(), BI));
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00001398
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00001399 // Make the PHI node use the select for all incoming values for BB1/BB2
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00001400 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN.getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
1401 if (PN.getIncomingBlock(i) == BB1 || PN.getIncomingBlock(i) == BB2)
1402 PN.setIncomingValue(i, SI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001403 }
1404 }
1405
1406 // Update any PHI nodes in our new successors.
Sanjay Patel5781d842016-03-12 16:52:17 +00001407 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(BB1))
1408 AddPredecessorToBlock(Succ, BIParent, BB1);
Misha Brukmanb1c93172005-04-21 23:48:37 +00001409
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00001410 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner389cfac2004-11-30 00:29:14 +00001411 return true;
1412}
1413
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001414// All instructions in Insts belong to different blocks that all unconditionally
1415// branch to a common successor. Analyze each instruction and return true if it
1416// would be possible to sink them into their successor, creating one common
1417// instruction instead. For every value that would be required to be provided by
1418// PHI node (because an operand varies in each input block), add to PHIOperands.
1419static bool canSinkInstructions(
1420 ArrayRef<Instruction *> Insts,
1421 DenseMap<Instruction *, SmallVector<Value *, 4>> &PHIOperands) {
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001422 // Prune out obviously bad instructions to move. Any non-store instruction
1423 // must have exactly one use, and we check later that use is by a single,
1424 // common PHI instruction in the successor.
1425 for (auto *I : Insts) {
1426 // These instructions may change or break semantics if moved.
1427 if (isa<PHINode>(I) || I->isEHPad() || isa<AllocaInst>(I) ||
1428 I->getType()->isTokenTy())
1429 return false;
Akira Hatanaka4ec7b202017-01-25 06:21:51 +00001430
1431 // Conservatively return false if I is an inline-asm instruction. Sinking
1432 // and merging inline-asm instructions can potentially create arguments
1433 // that cannot satisfy the inline-asm constraints.
1434 if (const auto *C = dyn_cast<CallInst>(I))
1435 if (C->isInlineAsm())
1436 return false;
1437
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001438 // Everything must have only one use too, apart from stores which
1439 // have no uses.
1440 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I) && !I->hasOneUse())
1441 return false;
1442 }
1443
1444 const Instruction *I0 = Insts.front();
1445 for (auto *I : Insts)
1446 if (!I->isSameOperationAs(I0))
1447 return false;
1448
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001449 // All instructions in Insts are known to be the same opcode. If they aren't
1450 // stores, check the only user of each is a PHI or in the same block as the
1451 // instruction, because if a user is in the same block as an instruction
1452 // we're contemplating sinking, it must already be determined to be sinkable.
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001453 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I0)) {
1454 auto *PNUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
James Molloy6c009c12016-09-07 09:01:22 +00001455 auto *Succ = I0->getParent()->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
Eric Liu8c7d28b2017-03-15 15:29:42 +00001456 if (!all_of(Insts, [&PNUse,&Succ](const Instruction *I) -> bool {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001457 auto *U = cast<Instruction>(*I->user_begin());
Eric Liu8c7d28b2017-03-15 15:29:42 +00001458 return (PNUse &&
1459 PNUse->getParent() == Succ &&
1460 PNUse->getIncomingValueForBlock(I->getParent()) == I) ||
1461 U->getParent() == I->getParent();
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001462 }))
1463 return false;
1464 }
1465
Aditya Kumar24f6ad512017-03-16 14:09:18 +00001466 // Because SROA can't handle speculating stores of selects, try not
1467 // to sink loads or stores of allocas when we'd have to create a PHI for
1468 // the address operand. Also, because it is likely that loads or stores
1469 // of allocas will disappear when Mem2Reg/SROA is run, don't sink them.
1470 // This can cause code churn which can have unintended consequences down
1471 // the line - see https://llvm.org/bugs/show_bug.cgi?id=30244.
1472 // FIXME: This is a workaround for a deficiency in SROA - see
1473 // https://llvm.org/bugs/show_bug.cgi?id=30188
1474 if (isa<StoreInst>(I0) && any_of(Insts, [](const Instruction *I) {
1475 return isa<AllocaInst>(I->getOperand(1));
1476 }))
1477 return false;
1478 if (isa<LoadInst>(I0) && any_of(Insts, [](const Instruction *I) {
1479 return isa<AllocaInst>(I->getOperand(0));
1480 }))
1481 return false;
1482
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001483 for (unsigned OI = 0, OE = I0->getNumOperands(); OI != OE; ++OI) {
1484 if (I0->getOperand(OI)->getType()->isTokenTy())
1485 // Don't touch any operand of token type.
1486 return false;
James Molloy104370a2016-09-11 09:00:03 +00001487
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001488 auto SameAsI0 = [&I0, OI](const Instruction *I) {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001489 assert(I->getNumOperands() == I0->getNumOperands());
1490 return I->getOperand(OI) == I0->getOperand(OI);
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001491 };
1492 if (!all_of(Insts, SameAsI0)) {
1493 if (!canReplaceOperandWithVariable(I0, OI))
1494 // We can't create a PHI from this GEP.
1495 return false;
James Molloy923e98c2016-08-31 10:46:16 +00001496 // Don't create indirect calls! The called value is the final operand.
1497 if ((isa<CallInst>(I0) || isa<InvokeInst>(I0)) && OI == OE - 1) {
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001498 // FIXME: if the call was *already* indirect, we should do this.
1499 return false;
James Molloy923e98c2016-08-31 10:46:16 +00001500 }
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001501 for (auto *I : Insts)
1502 PHIOperands[I].push_back(I->getOperand(OI));
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001503 }
1504 }
1505 return true;
1506}
1507
1508// Assuming canSinkLastInstruction(Blocks) has returned true, sink the last
1509// instruction of every block in Blocks to their common successor, commoning
1510// into one instruction.
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001511static bool sinkLastInstruction(ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks) {
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001512 auto *BBEnd = Blocks[0]->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
1513
1514 // canSinkLastInstruction returning true guarantees that every block has at
1515 // least one non-terminator instruction.
1516 SmallVector<Instruction*,4> Insts;
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001517 for (auto *BB : Blocks) {
1518 Instruction *I = BB->getTerminator();
1519 do {
1520 I = I->getPrevNode();
1521 } while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I) && I != &BB->front());
1522 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
1523 Insts.push_back(I);
1524 }
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001525
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001526 // The only checking we need to do now is that all users of all instructions
1527 // are the same PHI node. canSinkLastInstruction should have checked this but
1528 // it is slightly over-aggressive - it gets confused by commutative instructions
1529 // so double-check it here.
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001530 Instruction *I0 = Insts.front();
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001531 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I0)) {
1532 auto *PNUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
1533 if (!all_of(Insts, [&PNUse](const Instruction *I) -> bool {
1534 auto *U = cast<Instruction>(*I->user_begin());
1535 return U == PNUse;
1536 }))
1537 return false;
1538 }
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001539
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001540 // We don't need to do any more checking here; canSinkLastInstruction should
1541 // have done it all for us.
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001542 SmallVector<Value*, 4> NewOperands;
1543 for (unsigned O = 0, E = I0->getNumOperands(); O != E; ++O) {
1544 // This check is different to that in canSinkLastInstruction. There, we
1545 // cared about the global view once simplifycfg (and instcombine) have
1546 // completed - it takes into account PHIs that become trivially
1547 // simplifiable. However here we need a more local view; if an operand
1548 // differs we create a PHI and rely on instcombine to clean up the very
1549 // small mess we may make.
1550 bool NeedPHI = any_of(Insts, [&I0, O](const Instruction *I) {
1551 return I->getOperand(O) != I0->getOperand(O);
1552 });
1553 if (!NeedPHI) {
1554 NewOperands.push_back(I0->getOperand(O));
1555 continue;
1556 }
1557
1558 // Create a new PHI in the successor block and populate it.
1559 auto *Op = I0->getOperand(O);
1560 assert(!Op->getType()->isTokenTy() && "Can't PHI tokens!");
1561 auto *PN = PHINode::Create(Op->getType(), Insts.size(),
1562 Op->getName() + ".sink", &BBEnd->front());
1563 for (auto *I : Insts)
1564 PN->addIncoming(I->getOperand(O), I->getParent());
1565 NewOperands.push_back(PN);
1566 }
1567
1568 // Arbitrarily use I0 as the new "common" instruction; remap its operands
1569 // and move it to the start of the successor block.
1570 for (unsigned O = 0, E = I0->getNumOperands(); O != E; ++O)
1571 I0->getOperandUse(O).set(NewOperands[O]);
1572 I0->moveBefore(&*BBEnd->getFirstInsertionPt());
1573
Robert Lougher5bf04162017-01-04 17:40:32 +00001574 // Update metadata and IR flags, and merge debug locations.
James Molloyd13b1232016-08-30 10:56:08 +00001575 for (auto *I : Insts)
James Molloy0efb96a2016-09-19 08:23:08 +00001576 if (I != I0) {
Dehao Chenf4646272017-10-02 18:13:14 +00001577 // The debug location for the "common" instruction is the merged locations
1578 // of all the commoned instructions. We start with the original location
1579 // of the "common" instruction and iteratively merge each location in the
1580 // loop below.
1581 // This is an N-way merge, which will be inefficient if I0 is a CallInst.
1582 // However, as N-way merge for CallInst is rare, so we use simplified API
1583 // instead of using complex API for N-way merge.
1584 I0->applyMergedLocation(I0->getDebugLoc(), I->getDebugLoc());
Florian Hahn406f1ff2018-08-24 11:40:04 +00001585 combineMetadataForCSE(I0, I, true);
James Molloy0efb96a2016-09-19 08:23:08 +00001586 I0->andIRFlags(I);
1587 }
James Molloyd13b1232016-08-30 10:56:08 +00001588
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001589 if (!isa<StoreInst>(I0)) {
1590 // canSinkLastInstruction checked that all instructions were used by
1591 // one and only one PHI node. Find that now, RAUW it to our common
1592 // instruction and nuke it.
1593 assert(I0->hasOneUse());
1594 auto *PN = cast<PHINode>(*I0->user_begin());
1595 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(I0);
1596 PN->eraseFromParent();
1597 }
1598
1599 // Finally nuke all instructions apart from the common instruction.
1600 for (auto *I : Insts)
1601 if (I != I0)
1602 I->eraseFromParent();
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001603
1604 return true;
1605}
1606
1607namespace {
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00001608
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001609 // LockstepReverseIterator - Iterates through instructions
1610 // in a set of blocks in reverse order from the first non-terminator.
1611 // For example (assume all blocks have size n):
1612 // LockstepReverseIterator I([B1, B2, B3]);
1613 // *I-- = [B1[n], B2[n], B3[n]];
1614 // *I-- = [B1[n-1], B2[n-1], B3[n-1]];
1615 // *I-- = [B1[n-2], B2[n-2], B3[n-2]];
1616 // ...
1617 class LockstepReverseIterator {
1618 ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks;
1619 SmallVector<Instruction*,4> Insts;
1620 bool Fail;
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00001621
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001622 public:
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00001623 LockstepReverseIterator(ArrayRef<BasicBlock*> Blocks) : Blocks(Blocks) {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001624 reset();
1625 }
1626
1627 void reset() {
1628 Fail = false;
1629 Insts.clear();
1630 for (auto *BB : Blocks) {
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001631 Instruction *Inst = BB->getTerminator();
1632 for (Inst = Inst->getPrevNode(); Inst && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst);)
1633 Inst = Inst->getPrevNode();
1634 if (!Inst) {
1635 // Block wasn't big enough.
1636 Fail = true;
1637 return;
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001638 }
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001639 Insts.push_back(Inst);
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001640 }
1641 }
1642
1643 bool isValid() const {
1644 return !Fail;
1645 }
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001646
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00001647 void operator--() {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001648 if (Fail)
1649 return;
1650 for (auto *&Inst : Insts) {
Dehao Chen018a3af2016-10-17 19:28:44 +00001651 for (Inst = Inst->getPrevNode(); Inst && isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst);)
1652 Inst = Inst->getPrevNode();
Benjamin Kramerd8b07972016-10-15 13:15:05 +00001653 // Already at beginning of block.
1654 if (!Inst) {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001655 Fail = true;
1656 return;
1657 }
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001658 }
1659 }
1660
1661 ArrayRef<Instruction*> operator * () const {
1662 return Insts;
1663 }
1664 };
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00001665
1666} // end anonymous namespace
James Molloy5bf21142016-08-22 19:07:15 +00001667
Michael Zolotukhinad371e02017-12-21 01:22:13 +00001668/// Check whether BB's predecessors end with unconditional branches. If it is
1669/// true, sink any common code from the predecessors to BB.
1670/// We also allow one predecessor to end with conditional branch (but no more
1671/// than one).
1672static bool SinkCommonCodeFromPredecessors(BasicBlock *BB) {
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001673 // We support two situations:
1674 // (1) all incoming arcs are unconditional
1675 // (2) one incoming arc is conditional
1676 //
1677 // (2) is very common in switch defaults and
1678 // else-if patterns;
1679 //
1680 // if (a) f(1);
1681 // else if (b) f(2);
1682 //
1683 // produces:
1684 //
1685 // [if]
1686 // / \
1687 // [f(1)] [if]
1688 // | | \
Amaury Sechet2fec7e42017-01-23 15:13:01 +00001689 // | | |
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001690 // | [f(2)]|
1691 // \ | /
1692 // [ end ]
1693 //
1694 // [end] has two unconditional predecessor arcs and one conditional. The
1695 // conditional refers to the implicit empty 'else' arc. This conditional
1696 // arc can also be caused by an empty default block in a switch.
1697 //
1698 // In this case, we attempt to sink code from all *unconditional* arcs.
1699 // If we can sink instructions from these arcs (determined during the scan
1700 // phase below) we insert a common successor for all unconditional arcs and
1701 // connect that to [end], to enable sinking:
1702 //
1703 // [if]
1704 // / \
1705 // [x(1)] [if]
1706 // | | \
1707 // | | \
1708 // | [x(2)] |
1709 // \ / |
1710 // [sink.split] |
1711 // \ /
1712 // [ end ]
1713 //
1714 SmallVector<BasicBlock*,4> UnconditionalPreds;
1715 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Michael Zolotukhinad371e02017-12-21 01:22:13 +00001716 for (auto *B : predecessors(BB)) {
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001717 auto *T = B->getTerminator();
1718 if (isa<BranchInst>(T) && cast<BranchInst>(T)->isUnconditional())
1719 UnconditionalPreds.push_back(B);
1720 else if ((isa<BranchInst>(T) || isa<SwitchInst>(T)) && !Cond)
1721 Cond = T;
1722 else
1723 return false;
1724 }
1725 if (UnconditionalPreds.size() < 2)
James Molloy475f4a72016-08-22 18:13:12 +00001726 return false;
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001727
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001728 bool Changed = false;
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001729 // We take a two-step approach to tail sinking. First we scan from the end of
1730 // each block upwards in lockstep. If the n'th instruction from the end of each
1731 // block can be sunk, those instructions are added to ValuesToSink and we
1732 // carry on. If we can sink an instruction but need to PHI-merge some operands
1733 // (because they're not identical in each instruction) we add these to
1734 // PHIOperands.
1735 unsigned ScanIdx = 0;
1736 SmallPtrSet<Value*,4> InstructionsToSink;
1737 DenseMap<Instruction*, SmallVector<Value*,4>> PHIOperands;
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001738 LockstepReverseIterator LRI(UnconditionalPreds);
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001739 while (LRI.isValid() &&
1740 canSinkInstructions(*LRI, PHIOperands)) {
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00001741 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: instruction can be sunk: " << *(*LRI)[0]
1742 << "\n");
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001743 InstructionsToSink.insert((*LRI).begin(), (*LRI).end());
1744 ++ScanIdx;
1745 --LRI;
1746 }
1747
James Molloy18d96e82016-09-11 08:07:30 +00001748 auto ProfitableToSinkInstruction = [&](LockstepReverseIterator &LRI) {
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001749 unsigned NumPHIdValues = 0;
1750 for (auto *I : *LRI)
1751 for (auto *V : PHIOperands[I])
1752 if (InstructionsToSink.count(V) == 0)
1753 ++NumPHIdValues;
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00001754 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: #phid values: " << NumPHIdValues << "\n");
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001755 unsigned NumPHIInsts = NumPHIdValues / UnconditionalPreds.size();
1756 if ((NumPHIdValues % UnconditionalPreds.size()) != 0)
1757 NumPHIInsts++;
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001758
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001759 return NumPHIInsts <= 1;
1760 };
1761
1762 if (ScanIdx > 0 && Cond) {
James Molloy18d96e82016-09-11 08:07:30 +00001763 // Check if we would actually sink anything first! This mutates the CFG and
1764 // adds an extra block. The goal in doing this is to allow instructions that
1765 // couldn't be sunk before to be sunk - obviously, speculatable instructions
1766 // (such as trunc, add) can be sunk and predicated already. So we check that
1767 // we're going to sink at least one non-speculatable instruction.
1768 LRI.reset();
1769 unsigned Idx = 0;
1770 bool Profitable = false;
1771 while (ProfitableToSinkInstruction(LRI) && Idx < ScanIdx) {
1772 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute((*LRI)[0])) {
1773 Profitable = true;
1774 break;
1775 }
1776 --LRI;
1777 ++Idx;
1778 }
1779 if (!Profitable)
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001780 return false;
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001781
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00001782 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: Splitting edge\n");
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001783 // We have a conditional edge and we're going to sink some instructions.
1784 // Insert a new block postdominating all blocks we're going to sink from.
Michael Zolotukhinad371e02017-12-21 01:22:13 +00001785 if (!SplitBlockPredecessors(BB, UnconditionalPreds, ".sink.split"))
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001786 // Edges couldn't be split.
1787 return false;
1788 Changed = true;
1789 }
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001790
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001791 // Now that we've analyzed all potential sinking candidates, perform the
1792 // actual sink. We iteratively sink the last non-terminator of the source
1793 // blocks into their common successor unless doing so would require too
1794 // many PHI instructions to be generated (currently only one PHI is allowed
1795 // per sunk instruction).
1796 //
1797 // We can use InstructionsToSink to discount values needing PHI-merging that will
1798 // actually be sunk in a later iteration. This allows us to be more
1799 // aggressive in what we sink. This does allow a false positive where we
1800 // sink presuming a later value will also be sunk, but stop half way through
1801 // and never actually sink it which means we produce more PHIs than intended.
1802 // This is unlikely in practice though.
1803 for (unsigned SinkIdx = 0; SinkIdx != ScanIdx; ++SinkIdx) {
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00001804 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SINK: Sink: "
1805 << *UnconditionalPreds[0]->getTerminator()->getPrevNode()
1806 << "\n");
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001807
1808 // Because we've sunk every instruction in turn, the current instruction to
1809 // sink is always at index 0.
James Molloy18d96e82016-09-11 08:07:30 +00001810 LRI.reset();
1811 if (!ProfitableToSinkInstruction(LRI)) {
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001812 // Too many PHIs would be created.
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00001813 LLVM_DEBUG(
1814 dbgs() << "SINK: stopping here, too many PHIs would be created!\n");
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001815 break;
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001816 }
Taewook Oh505a25a2017-01-28 07:05:43 +00001817
James Molloy88cad7e2016-09-01 12:58:13 +00001818 if (!sinkLastInstruction(UnconditionalPreds))
James Molloyeec6df32016-09-01 10:44:35 +00001819 return Changed;
Manman Ren93ab6492012-09-20 22:37:36 +00001820 NumSinkCommons++;
1821 Changed = true;
1822 }
1823 return Changed;
1824}
1825
Adrian Prantl5f8f34e42018-05-01 15:54:18 +00001826/// Determine if we can hoist sink a sole store instruction out of a
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001827/// conditional block.
1828///
1829/// We are looking for code like the following:
1830/// BrBB:
1831/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1832/// ... // No other stores or function calls (we could be calling a memory
1833/// ... // function).
1834/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1835/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1836/// ThenBB:
1837/// store i32 %add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1838/// br label EndBB
1839/// EndBB:
1840/// ...
1841/// We are going to transform this into:
1842/// BrBB:
1843/// store i32 %add, i32* %arrayidx2
1844/// ... //
1845/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1846/// %add.add5 = select i1 %cmp, i32 %add, %add5
1847/// store i32 %add.add5, i32* %arrayidx2
1848/// ...
1849///
1850/// \return The pointer to the value of the previous store if the store can be
1851/// hoisted into the predecessor block. 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramerad5c24f2013-05-23 16:09:15 +00001852static Value *isSafeToSpeculateStore(Instruction *I, BasicBlock *BrBB,
1853 BasicBlock *StoreBB, BasicBlock *EndBB) {
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001854 StoreInst *StoreToHoist = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(I);
1855 if (!StoreToHoist)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001856 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001857
1858 // Volatile or atomic.
1859 if (!StoreToHoist->isSimple())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001860 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001861
1862 Value *StorePtr = StoreToHoist->getPointerOperand();
1863
1864 // Look for a store to the same pointer in BrBB.
Hans Wennborg0c3518e2016-05-04 15:40:57 +00001865 unsigned MaxNumInstToLookAt = 9;
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00001866 for (Instruction &CurI : reverse(BrBB->instructionsWithoutDebug())) {
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001867 if (!MaxNumInstToLookAt)
1868 break;
Hans Wennborg0c3518e2016-05-04 15:40:57 +00001869 --MaxNumInstToLookAt;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001870
David L Kreitzer96674172016-08-12 21:06:53 +00001871 // Could be calling an instruction that affects memory like free().
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001872 if (CurI.mayHaveSideEffects() && !isa<StoreInst>(CurI))
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001873 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001874
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001875 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&CurI)) {
1876 // Found the previous store make sure it stores to the same location.
1877 if (SI->getPointerOperand() == StorePtr)
1878 // Found the previous store, return its value operand.
1879 return SI->getValueOperand();
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001880 return nullptr; // Unknown store.
David Majnemerd7708772016-06-24 04:05:21 +00001881 }
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001882 }
1883
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001884 return nullptr;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001885}
1886
Adrian Prantl5f8f34e42018-05-01 15:54:18 +00001887/// Speculate a conditional basic block flattening the CFG.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001888///
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001889/// Note that this is a very risky transform currently. Speculating
1890/// instructions like this is most often not desirable. Instead, there is an MI
1891/// pass which can do it with full awareness of the resource constraints.
1892/// However, some cases are "obvious" and we should do directly. An example of
1893/// this is speculating a single, reasonably cheap instruction.
1894///
1895/// There is only one distinct advantage to flattening the CFG at the IR level:
1896/// it makes very common but simplistic optimizations such as are common in
1897/// instcombine and the DAG combiner more powerful by removing CFG edges and
1898/// modeling their effects with easier to reason about SSA value graphs.
1899///
1900///
1901/// An illustration of this transform is turning this IR:
1902/// \code
1903/// BB:
1904/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1905/// br i1 %cmp, label %EndBB, label %ThenBB
1906/// ThenBB:
1907/// %sub = sub %x, %y
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001908/// br label BB2
Chandler Carruth8a4a1662013-01-24 08:05:06 +00001909/// EndBB:
1910/// %phi = phi [ %sub, %ThenBB ], [ 0, %EndBB ]
1911/// ...
1912/// \endcode
1913///
1914/// Into this IR:
1915/// \code
1916/// BB:
1917/// %cmp = icmp ult %x, %y
1918/// %sub = sub %x, %y
1919/// %cond = select i1 %cmp, 0, %sub
1920/// ...
1921/// \endcode
1922///
1923/// \returns true if the conditional block is removed.
Hal Finkela995f922014-07-10 14:41:31 +00001924static bool SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BranchInst *BI, BasicBlock *ThenBB,
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00001925 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Chandler Carruth1d20c022013-01-24 08:22:40 +00001926 // Be conservative for now. FP select instruction can often be expensive.
1927 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
1928 if (isa<FCmpInst>(BrCond))
1929 return false;
1930
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00001931 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
1932 BasicBlock *EndBB = ThenBB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
1933
1934 // If ThenBB is actually on the false edge of the conditional branch, remember
1935 // to swap the select operands later.
1936 bool Invert = false;
1937 if (ThenBB != BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
1938 assert(ThenBB == BI->getSuccessor(1) && "No edge from 'if' block?");
1939 Invert = true;
1940 }
1941 assert(EndBB == BI->getSuccessor(!Invert) && "No edge from to end block");
1942
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001943 // Keep a count of how many times instructions are used within CondBB when
1944 // they are candidates for sinking into CondBB. Specifically:
1945 // - They are defined in BB, and
1946 // - They have no side effects, and
1947 // - All of their uses are in CondBB.
1948 SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4> SinkCandidateUseCounts;
1949
Bjorn Petterssone73b85d12017-11-02 11:55:14 +00001950 SmallVector<Instruction *, 4> SpeculatedDbgIntrinsics;
1951
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001952 unsigned SpeculationCost = 0;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00001953 Value *SpeculatedStoreValue = nullptr;
1954 StoreInst *SpeculatedStore = nullptr;
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001955 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = ThenBB->begin(),
Benjamin Kramerb6d0bd42014-03-02 12:27:27 +00001956 BBE = std::prev(ThenBB->end());
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001957 BBI != BBE; ++BBI) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00001958 Instruction *I = &*BBI;
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001959 // Skip debug info.
Bjorn Petterssone73b85d12017-11-02 11:55:14 +00001960 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
1961 SpeculatedDbgIntrinsics.push_back(I);
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001962 continue;
Bjorn Petterssone73b85d12017-11-02 11:55:14 +00001963 }
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001964
Mark Lacey274f48b2015-04-12 18:18:51 +00001965 // Only speculatively execute a single instruction (not counting the
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00001966 // terminator) for now.
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00001967 ++SpeculationCost;
1968 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Devang Patel5aed7762009-03-06 06:00:17 +00001969 return false;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001970
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001971 // Don't hoist the instruction if it's unsafe or expensive.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001972 if (!isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(I) &&
1973 !(HoistCondStores && (SpeculatedStoreValue = isSafeToSpeculateStore(
1974 I, BB, ThenBB, EndBB))))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001975 return false;
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001976 if (!SpeculatedStoreValue &&
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00001977 ComputeSpeculationCost(I, TTI) >
1978 PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001979 return false;
1980
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001981 // Store the store speculation candidate.
1982 if (SpeculatedStoreValue)
1983 SpeculatedStore = cast<StoreInst>(I);
1984
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001985 // Do not hoist the instruction if any of its operands are defined but not
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00001986 // used in BB. The transformation will prevent the operand from
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001987 // being sunk into the use block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001988 for (User::op_iterator i = I->op_begin(), e = I->op_end(); i != e; ++i) {
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001989 Instruction *OpI = dyn_cast<Instruction>(*i);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00001990 if (!OpI || OpI->getParent() != BB || OpI->mayHaveSideEffects())
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001991 continue; // Not a candidate for sinking.
1992
1993 ++SinkCandidateUseCounts[OpI];
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00001994 }
1995 }
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00001996
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00001997 // Consider any sink candidates which are only used in CondBB as costs for
1998 // speculation. Note, while we iterate over a DenseMap here, we are summing
1999 // and so iteration order isn't significant.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002000 for (SmallDenseMap<Instruction *, unsigned, 4>::iterator
2001 I = SinkCandidateUseCounts.begin(),
2002 E = SinkCandidateUseCounts.end();
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00002003 I != E; ++I)
2004 if (I->first->getNumUses() == I->second) {
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00002005 ++SpeculationCost;
2006 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruthceff2222013-01-25 05:40:09 +00002007 return false;
2008 }
2009
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002010 // Check that the PHI nodes can be converted to selects.
2011 bool HaveRewritablePHIs = false;
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00002012 for (PHINode &PN : EndBB->phis()) {
2013 Value *OrigV = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
2014 Value *ThenV = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(ThenBB);
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002015
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00002016 // FIXME: Try to remove some of the duplication with HoistThenElseCodeToIf.
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002017 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
Chandler Carruthe2a779f2013-01-24 09:59:39 +00002018 if (ThenV == OrigV)
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002019 continue;
2020
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00002021 // Don't convert to selects if we could remove undefined behavior instead.
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00002022 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(OrigV, &PN) ||
2023 passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(ThenV, &PN))
Arnold Schwaighoferd7d010e2014-10-10 01:27:02 +00002024 return false;
2025
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002026 HaveRewritablePHIs = true;
Rafael Espindolaa5e536a2013-06-04 14:11:59 +00002027 ConstantExpr *OrigCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(OrigV);
2028 ConstantExpr *ThenCE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(ThenV);
2029 if (!OrigCE && !ThenCE)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00002030 continue; // Known safe and cheap.
2031
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002032 if ((ThenCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(ThenCE)) ||
2033 (OrigCE && !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(OrigCE)))
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00002034 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002035 unsigned OrigCost = OrigCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(OrigCE, TTI) : 0;
2036 unsigned ThenCost = ThenCE ? ComputeSpeculationCost(ThenCE, TTI) : 0;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002037 unsigned MaxCost =
2038 2 * PHINodeFoldingThreshold * TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00002039 if (OrigCost + ThenCost > MaxCost)
Chandler Carruth8a210052013-01-24 11:53:01 +00002040 return false;
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002041
Chandler Carruth01bffaa2013-01-24 12:05:17 +00002042 // Account for the cost of an unfolded ConstantExpr which could end up
2043 // getting expanded into Instructions.
2044 // FIXME: This doesn't account for how many operations are combined in the
Chandler Carruth329b5902013-01-27 06:42:03 +00002045 // constant expression.
2046 ++SpeculationCost;
2047 if (SpeculationCost > 1)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002048 return false;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002049 }
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002050
2051 // If there are no PHIs to process, bail early. This helps ensure idempotence
2052 // as well.
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002053 if (!HaveRewritablePHIs && !(HoistCondStores && SpeculatedStoreValue))
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002054 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002055
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002056 // If we get here, we can hoist the instruction and if-convert.
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00002057 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SPECULATIVELY EXECUTING BB" << *ThenBB << "\n";);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002058
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002059 // Insert a select of the value of the speculated store.
2060 if (SpeculatedStoreValue) {
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00002061 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(BI);
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002062 Value *TrueV = SpeculatedStore->getValueOperand();
2063 Value *FalseV = SpeculatedStoreValue;
2064 if (Invert)
2065 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
Sanjay Patel796db352016-03-26 23:30:50 +00002066 Value *S = Builder.CreateSelect(
Craig Topper7c7fcab2017-10-31 19:03:51 +00002067 BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, "spec.store.select", BI);
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002068 SpeculatedStore->setOperand(0, S);
Dehao Chenf4646272017-10-02 18:13:14 +00002069 SpeculatedStore->applyMergedLocation(BI->getDebugLoc(),
2070 SpeculatedStore->getDebugLoc());
Arnold Schwaighofer474df6d2013-04-29 21:28:24 +00002071 }
2072
Igor Laevsky7310c682015-11-18 14:50:18 +00002073 // Metadata can be dependent on the condition we are hoisting above.
2074 // Conservatively strip all metadata on the instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002075 for (auto &I : *ThenBB)
Igor Laevsky7310c682015-11-18 14:50:18 +00002076 I.dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
2077
Chandler Carruth7481ca82013-01-24 11:52:58 +00002078 // Hoist the instructions.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002079 BB->getInstList().splice(BI->getIterator(), ThenBB->getInstList(),
2080 ThenBB->begin(), std::prev(ThenBB->end()));
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00002081
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002082 // Insert selects and rewrite the PHI operands.
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00002083 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(BI);
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00002084 for (PHINode &PN : EndBB->phis()) {
2085 unsigned OrigI = PN.getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
2086 unsigned ThenI = PN.getBasicBlockIndex(ThenBB);
2087 Value *OrigV = PN.getIncomingValue(OrigI);
2088 Value *ThenV = PN.getIncomingValue(ThenI);
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002089
2090 // Skip PHIs which are trivial.
2091 if (OrigV == ThenV)
2092 continue;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002093
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002094 // Create a select whose true value is the speculatively executed value and
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002095 // false value is the preexisting value. Swap them if the branch
2096 // destinations were inverted.
2097 Value *TrueV = ThenV, *FalseV = OrigV;
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00002098 if (Invert)
Chandler Carruth76aacbd2013-01-24 10:40:51 +00002099 std::swap(TrueV, FalseV);
Sanjay Patelf11ab052016-04-15 15:32:12 +00002100 Value *V = Builder.CreateSelect(
Craig Topper7c7fcab2017-10-31 19:03:51 +00002101 BrCond, TrueV, FalseV, "spec.select", BI);
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00002102 PN.setIncomingValue(OrigI, V);
2103 PN.setIncomingValue(ThenI, V);
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002104 }
2105
Bjorn Petterssone73b85d12017-11-02 11:55:14 +00002106 // Remove speculated dbg intrinsics.
2107 // FIXME: Is it possible to do this in a more elegant way? Moving/merging the
2108 // dbg value for the different flows and inserting it after the select.
2109 for (Instruction *I : SpeculatedDbgIntrinsics)
2110 I->eraseFromParent();
2111
Evan Cheng89553cc2008-06-12 21:15:59 +00002112 ++NumSpeculations;
Evan Cheng89200c92008-06-07 08:52:29 +00002113 return true;
2114}
2115
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002116/// Return true if we can thread a branch across this block.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002117static bool BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BasicBlock *BB) {
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002118 unsigned Size = 0;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002119
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00002120 for (Instruction &I : BB->instructionsWithoutDebug()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002121 if (Size > 10)
2122 return false; // Don't clone large BB's.
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00002123 ++Size;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002124
Dale Johannesened6f5a82009-03-12 23:18:09 +00002125 // We can only support instructions that do not define values that are
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002126 // live outside of the current basic block.
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00002127 for (User *U : I.users()) {
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00002128 Instruction *UI = cast<Instruction>(U);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002129 if (UI->getParent() != BB || isa<PHINode>(UI))
2130 return false;
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002131 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002132
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002133 // Looks ok, continue checking.
2134 }
Chris Lattner6c701062005-09-20 01:48:40 +00002135
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002136 return true;
2137}
2138
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002139/// If we have a conditional branch on a PHI node value that is defined in the
2140/// same block as the branch and if any PHI entries are constants, thread edges
2141/// corresponding to that entry to be branches to their ultimate destination.
Peter Collingbourne0609acc2017-02-15 03:01:11 +00002142static bool FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BranchInst *BI, const DataLayout &DL,
2143 AssumptionCache *AC) {
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002144 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
2145 PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition());
Chris Lattner049cb442005-09-19 23:57:04 +00002146 // NOTE: we currently cannot transform this case if the PHI node is used
2147 // outside of the block.
Chris Lattnerf0bd8d02005-09-20 00:43:16 +00002148 if (!PN || PN->getParent() != BB || !PN->hasOneUse())
2149 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002150
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002151 // Degenerate case of a single entry PHI.
2152 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 1) {
Chris Lattnerdc3f6f22008-12-03 19:44:02 +00002153 FoldSingleEntryPHINodes(PN->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002154 return true;
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002155 }
2156
2157 // Now we know that this block has multiple preds and two succs.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002158 if (!BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB))
2159 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002160
Justin Lebardb639492016-02-12 21:01:36 +00002161 // Can't fold blocks that contain noduplicate or convergent calls.
David Majnemer0a16c222016-08-11 21:15:00 +00002162 if (any_of(*BB, [](const Instruction &I) {
Justin Lebardb639492016-02-12 21:01:36 +00002163 const CallInst *CI = dyn_cast<CallInst>(&I);
2164 return CI && (CI->cannotDuplicate() || CI->isConvergent());
2165 }))
2166 return false;
Tom Stellarde1631dd2013-10-21 20:07:30 +00002167
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002168 // Okay, this is a simple enough basic block. See if any phi values are
2169 // constants.
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00002170 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PN->getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i) {
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002171 ConstantInt *CB = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(PN->getIncomingValue(i));
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002172 if (!CB || !CB->getType()->isIntegerTy(1))
2173 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002174
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002175 // Okay, we now know that all edges from PredBB should be revectored to
2176 // branch to RealDest.
2177 BasicBlock *PredBB = PN->getIncomingBlock(i);
2178 BasicBlock *RealDest = BI->getSuccessor(!CB->getZExtValue());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002179
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002180 if (RealDest == BB)
2181 continue; // Skip self loops.
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00002182 // Skip if the predecessor's terminator is an indirect branch.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002183 if (isa<IndirectBrInst>(PredBB->getTerminator()))
2184 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002185
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002186 // The dest block might have PHI nodes, other predecessors and other
2187 // difficult cases. Instead of being smart about this, just insert a new
2188 // block that jumps to the destination block, effectively splitting
2189 // the edge we are about to create.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002190 BasicBlock *EdgeBB =
2191 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), RealDest->getName() + ".critedge",
2192 RealDest->getParent(), RealDest);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002193 BranchInst::Create(RealDest, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002194
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00002195 // Update PHI nodes.
2196 AddPredecessorToBlock(RealDest, EdgeBB, BB);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002197
2198 // BB may have instructions that are being threaded over. Clone these
2199 // instructions into EdgeBB. We know that there will be no uses of the
2200 // cloned instructions outside of EdgeBB.
2201 BasicBlock::iterator InsertPt = EdgeBB->begin();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002202 DenseMap<Value *, Value *> TranslateMap; // Track translated values.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002203 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = BB->begin(); &*BBI != BI; ++BBI) {
2204 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BBI)) {
2205 TranslateMap[PN] = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(PredBB);
2206 continue;
2207 }
2208 // Clone the instruction.
2209 Instruction *N = BBI->clone();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002210 if (BBI->hasName())
2211 N->setName(BBI->getName() + ".c");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002212
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002213 // Update operands due to translation.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002214 for (User::op_iterator i = N->op_begin(), e = N->op_end(); i != e; ++i) {
2215 DenseMap<Value *, Value *>::iterator PI = TranslateMap.find(*i);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002216 if (PI != TranslateMap.end())
2217 *i = PI->second;
2218 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002219
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002220 // Check for trivial simplification.
Daniel Berlin4d0fe642017-04-28 19:55:38 +00002221 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(N, {DL, nullptr, nullptr, AC})) {
David Majnemerb8da3a22016-06-25 00:04:10 +00002222 if (!BBI->use_empty())
2223 TranslateMap[&*BBI] = V;
2224 if (!N->mayHaveSideEffects()) {
Reid Kleckner96ab8722017-05-18 17:24:10 +00002225 N->deleteValue(); // Instruction folded away, don't need actual inst
David Majnemerb8da3a22016-06-25 00:04:10 +00002226 N = nullptr;
2227 }
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002228 } else {
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002229 if (!BBI->use_empty())
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002230 TranslateMap[&*BBI] = N;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002231 }
David Majnemerb8da3a22016-06-25 00:04:10 +00002232 // Insert the new instruction into its new home.
2233 if (N)
2234 EdgeBB->getInstList().insert(InsertPt, N);
Peter Collingbourne0609acc2017-02-15 03:01:11 +00002235
2236 // Register the new instruction with the assumption cache if necessary.
2237 if (auto *II = dyn_cast_or_null<IntrinsicInst>(N))
2238 if (II->getIntrinsicID() == Intrinsic::assume)
2239 AC->registerAssumption(II);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002240 }
2241
2242 // Loop over all of the edges from PredBB to BB, changing them to branch
2243 // to EdgeBB instead.
2244 TerminatorInst *PredBBTI = PredBB->getTerminator();
2245 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PredBBTI->getNumSuccessors(); i != e; ++i)
2246 if (PredBBTI->getSuccessor(i) == BB) {
2247 BB->removePredecessor(PredBB);
2248 PredBBTI->setSuccessor(i, EdgeBB);
2249 }
Bill Wendling4f163df2011-06-04 09:42:04 +00002250
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002251 // Recurse, simplifying any other constants.
Justin Bogner6f1740d2018-08-20 06:37:11 +00002252 return FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL, AC) || true;
Zhou Sheng75b871f2007-01-11 12:24:14 +00002253 }
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002254
2255 return false;
2256}
2257
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002258/// Given a BB that starts with the specified two-entry PHI node,
2259/// see if we can eliminate it.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002260static bool FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PHINode *PN, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
2261 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002262 // Ok, this is a two entry PHI node. Check to see if this is a simple "if
2263 // statement", which has a very simple dominance structure. Basically, we
2264 // are trying to find the condition that is being branched on, which
2265 // subsequently causes this merge to happen. We really want control
2266 // dependence information for this check, but simplifycfg can't keep it up
2267 // to date, and this catches most of the cases we care about anyway.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002268 BasicBlock *BB = PN->getParent();
Matt Morehouse236cdaf2018-03-22 17:07:51 +00002269 const Function *Fn = BB->getParent();
2270 if (Fn && Fn->hasFnAttribute(Attribute::OptForFuzzing))
2271 return false;
2272
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002273 BasicBlock *IfTrue, *IfFalse;
2274 Value *IfCond = GetIfCondition(BB, IfTrue, IfFalse);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00002275 if (!IfCond ||
2276 // Don't bother if the branch will be constant folded trivially.
2277 isa<ConstantInt>(IfCond))
2278 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002279
Chris Lattner95adf8f12006-11-18 19:19:36 +00002280 // Okay, we found that we can merge this two-entry phi node into a select.
2281 // Doing so would require us to fold *all* two entry phi nodes in this block.
2282 // At some point this becomes non-profitable (particularly if the target
2283 // doesn't support cmov's). Only do this transformation if there are two or
2284 // fewer PHI nodes in this block.
2285 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
2286 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++NumPhis, ++I)
2287 if (NumPhis > 2)
2288 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002289
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002290 // Loop over the PHI's seeing if we can promote them all to select
2291 // instructions. While we are at it, keep track of the instructions
2292 // that need to be moved to the dominating block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002293 SmallPtrSet<Instruction *, 4> AggressiveInsts;
Peter Collingbourne616044a2011-04-29 18:47:38 +00002294 unsigned MaxCostVal0 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold,
2295 MaxCostVal1 = PHINodeFoldingThreshold;
James Molloy7c336572015-02-11 12:15:41 +00002296 MaxCostVal0 *= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
2297 MaxCostVal1 *= TargetTransformInfo::TCC_Basic;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002298
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002299 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = BB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);) {
2300 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II++);
Daniel Berlin4d0fe642017-04-28 19:55:38 +00002301 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(PN, {DL, PN})) {
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00002302 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002303 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00002304 continue;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002305 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002306
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +00002307 if (!DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(0), BB, &AggressiveInsts,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002308 MaxCostVal0, TTI) ||
Peter Collingbournee3511e12011-04-29 18:47:31 +00002309 !DominatesMergePoint(PN->getIncomingValue(1), BB, &AggressiveInsts,
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002310 MaxCostVal1, TTI))
Chris Lattnerb42d2932010-12-14 07:20:29 +00002311 return false;
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002312 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002313
Sylvestre Ledru35521e22012-07-23 08:51:15 +00002314 // If we folded the first phi, PN dangles at this point. Refresh it. If
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002315 // we ran out of PHIs then we simplified them all.
2316 PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002317 if (!PN)
2318 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002319
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002320 // Don't fold i1 branches on PHIs which contain binary operators. These can
2321 // often be turned into switches and other things.
2322 if (PN->getType()->isIntegerTy(1) &&
2323 (isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(0)) ||
2324 isa<BinaryOperator>(PN->getIncomingValue(1)) ||
2325 isa<BinaryOperator>(IfCond)))
2326 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002327
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002328 // If all PHI nodes are promotable, check to make sure that all instructions
2329 // in the predecessor blocks can be promoted as well. If not, we won't be able
2330 // to get rid of the control flow, so it's not worth promoting to select
2331 // instructions.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002332 BasicBlock *DomBlock = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002333 BasicBlock *IfBlock1 = PN->getIncomingBlock(0);
2334 BasicBlock *IfBlock2 = PN->getIncomingBlock(1);
2335 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock1->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002336 IfBlock1 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002337 } else {
2338 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock1);
Chandler Carruth9ae926b2018-08-26 09:51:22 +00002339 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock1->begin(); !I->isTerminator(); ++I)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002340 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(&*I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002341 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002342 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control flow, so
2343 // the xform is not worth it.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002344 return false;
2345 }
2346 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002347
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002348 if (cast<BranchInst>(IfBlock2->getTerminator())->isConditional()) {
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002349 IfBlock2 = nullptr;
Chris Lattner9ac168d2010-12-14 07:41:39 +00002350 } else {
2351 DomBlock = *pred_begin(IfBlock2);
Chandler Carruth9ae926b2018-08-26 09:51:22 +00002352 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = IfBlock2->begin(); !I->isTerminator(); ++I)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002353 if (!AggressiveInsts.count(&*I) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002354 // This is not an aggressive instruction that we can promote.
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002355 // Because of this, we won't be able to get rid of the control flow, so
2356 // the xform is not worth it.
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002357 return false;
2358 }
2359 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002360
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00002361 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOUND IF CONDITION! " << *IfCond
2362 << " T: " << IfTrue->getName()
2363 << " F: " << IfFalse->getName() << "\n");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002364
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002365 // If we can still promote the PHI nodes after this gauntlet of tests,
2366 // do all of the PHI's now.
Chris Lattner7499b452010-12-14 08:46:09 +00002367 Instruction *InsertPt = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00002368 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(InsertPt);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002369
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002370 // Move all 'aggressive' instructions, which are defined in the
2371 // conditional parts of the if's up to the dominating block.
David Majnemere8fd5f92016-08-29 17:14:08 +00002372 if (IfBlock1) {
2373 for (auto &I : *IfBlock1)
2374 I.dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002375 DomBlock->getInstList().splice(InsertPt->getIterator(),
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002376 IfBlock1->getInstList(), IfBlock1->begin(),
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002377 IfBlock1->getTerminator()->getIterator());
David Majnemere8fd5f92016-08-29 17:14:08 +00002378 }
2379 if (IfBlock2) {
2380 for (auto &I : *IfBlock2)
2381 I.dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002382 DomBlock->getInstList().splice(InsertPt->getIterator(),
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002383 IfBlock2->getInstList(), IfBlock2->begin(),
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002384 IfBlock2->getTerminator()->getIterator());
David Majnemere8fd5f92016-08-29 17:14:08 +00002385 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002386
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002387 while (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin())) {
2388 // Change the PHI node into a select instruction.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002389 Value *TrueVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfFalse);
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002390 Value *FalseVal = PN->getIncomingValue(PN->getIncomingBlock(0) == IfTrue);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002391
Sanjay Patel9e23fed2016-03-17 15:30:52 +00002392 Value *Sel = Builder.CreateSelect(IfCond, TrueVal, FalseVal, "", InsertPt);
2393 PN->replaceAllUsesWith(Sel);
2394 Sel->takeName(PN);
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00002395 PN->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002396 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002397
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00002398 // At this point, IfBlock1 and IfBlock2 are both empty, so our if statement
2399 // has been flattened. Change DomBlock to jump directly to our new block to
2400 // avoid other simplifycfg's kicking in on the diamond.
2401 TerminatorInst *OldTI = DomBlock->getTerminator();
Devang Patel5c810ce2011-05-18 18:16:44 +00002402 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
2403 Builder.CreateBr(BB);
Chris Lattner335f0e42010-12-14 08:01:53 +00002404 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattnercc14ebc2005-09-23 06:39:30 +00002405 return true;
2406}
Chris Lattner748f9032005-09-19 23:49:37 +00002407
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002408/// If we found a conditional branch that goes to two returning blocks,
2409/// try to merge them together into one return,
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002410/// introducing a select if the return values disagree.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002411static bool SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BranchInst *BI,
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002412 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002413 assert(BI->isConditional() && "Must be a conditional branch");
2414 BasicBlock *TrueSucc = BI->getSuccessor(0);
2415 BasicBlock *FalseSucc = BI->getSuccessor(1);
2416 ReturnInst *TrueRet = cast<ReturnInst>(TrueSucc->getTerminator());
2417 ReturnInst *FalseRet = cast<ReturnInst>(FalseSucc->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002418
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002419 // Check to ensure both blocks are empty (just a return) or optionally empty
2420 // with PHI nodes. If there are other instructions, merging would cause extra
2421 // computation on one path or the other.
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002422 if (!TrueSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00002423 return false;
Chris Lattner4088e2b2010-12-13 01:47:07 +00002424 if (!FalseSucc->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
Devang Patel086b2122009-02-05 00:30:42 +00002425 return false;
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002426
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002427 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002428 // Okay, we found a branch that is going to two return nodes. If
2429 // there is no return value for this function, just change the
2430 // branch into a return.
2431 if (FalseRet->getNumOperands() == 0) {
2432 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
2433 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002434 Builder.CreateRetVoid();
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00002435 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002436 return true;
2437 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002438
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002439 // Otherwise, figure out what the true and false return values are
2440 // so we can insert a new select instruction.
2441 Value *TrueValue = TrueRet->getReturnValue();
2442 Value *FalseValue = FalseRet->getReturnValue();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002443
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002444 // Unwrap any PHI nodes in the return blocks.
2445 if (PHINode *TVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(TrueValue))
2446 if (TVPN->getParent() == TrueSucc)
2447 TrueValue = TVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
2448 if (PHINode *FVPN = dyn_cast_or_null<PHINode>(FalseValue))
2449 if (FVPN->getParent() == FalseSucc)
2450 FalseValue = FVPN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002451
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002452 // In order for this transformation to be safe, we must be able to
2453 // unconditionally execute both operands to the return. This is
2454 // normally the case, but we could have a potentially-trapping
2455 // constant expression that prevents this transformation from being
2456 // safe.
2457 if (ConstantExpr *TCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(TrueValue))
2458 if (TCV->canTrap())
2459 return false;
2460 if (ConstantExpr *FCV = dyn_cast_or_null<ConstantExpr>(FalseValue))
2461 if (FCV->canTrap())
2462 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002463
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002464 // Okay, we collected all the mapped values and checked them for sanity, and
2465 // defined to really do this transformation. First, update the CFG.
2466 TrueSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
2467 FalseSucc->removePredecessor(BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002468
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002469 // Insert select instructions where needed.
2470 Value *BrCond = BI->getCondition();
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002471 if (TrueValue) {
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002472 // Insert a select if the results differ.
Dan Gohmanfa1211f2008-07-23 00:34:11 +00002473 if (TrueValue == FalseValue || isa<UndefValue>(FalseValue)) {
2474 } else if (isa<UndefValue>(TrueValue)) {
2475 TrueValue = FalseValue;
2476 } else {
Sanjay Patelfacf45a2016-04-27 23:14:12 +00002477 TrueValue =
2478 Builder.CreateSelect(BrCond, TrueValue, FalseValue, "retval", BI);
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002479 }
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002480 }
2481
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002482 Value *RI =
2483 !TrueValue ? Builder.CreateRetVoid() : Builder.CreateRet(TrueValue);
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00002484
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002485 (void)RI;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002486
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00002487 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "\nCHANGING BRANCH TO TWO RETURNS INTO SELECT:"
2488 << "\n " << *BI << "NewRet = " << *RI << "TRUEBLOCK: "
2489 << *TrueSucc << "FALSEBLOCK: " << *FalseSucc);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002490
Eli Friedmancb61afb2008-12-16 20:54:32 +00002491 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
2492
Chris Lattner86bbf332008-04-24 00:01:19 +00002493 return true;
2494}
2495
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002496/// Return true if the given instruction is available
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002497/// in its predecessor block. If yes, the instruction will be removed.
David Stenberg0af67e52018-05-18 08:52:15 +00002498static bool tryCSEWithPredecessor(Instruction *Inst, BasicBlock *PB) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002499 if (!isa<BinaryOperator>(Inst) && !isa<CmpInst>(Inst))
2500 return false;
Benjamin Kramer135f7352016-06-26 12:28:59 +00002501 for (Instruction &I : *PB) {
2502 Instruction *PBI = &I;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002503 // Check whether Inst and PBI generate the same value.
2504 if (Inst->isIdenticalTo(PBI)) {
2505 Inst->replaceAllUsesWith(PBI);
2506 Inst->eraseFromParent();
2507 return true;
2508 }
2509 }
2510 return false;
2511}
Nick Lewycky3c3feaf2012-01-25 09:43:14 +00002512
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002513/// Return true if either PBI or BI has branch weight available, and store
2514/// the weights in {Pred|Succ}{True|False}Weight. If one of PBI and BI does
2515/// not have branch weight, use 1:1 as its weight.
2516static bool extractPredSuccWeights(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI,
2517 uint64_t &PredTrueWeight,
2518 uint64_t &PredFalseWeight,
2519 uint64_t &SuccTrueWeight,
2520 uint64_t &SuccFalseWeight) {
2521 bool PredHasWeights =
2522 PBI->extractProfMetadata(PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight);
2523 bool SuccHasWeights =
2524 BI->extractProfMetadata(SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
2525 if (PredHasWeights || SuccHasWeights) {
2526 if (!PredHasWeights)
2527 PredTrueWeight = PredFalseWeight = 1;
2528 if (!SuccHasWeights)
2529 SuccTrueWeight = SuccFalseWeight = 1;
2530 return true;
2531 } else {
2532 return false;
2533 }
2534}
2535
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00002536/// If this basic block is simple enough, and if a predecessor branches to us
2537/// and one of our successors, fold the block into the predecessor and use
2538/// logical operations to pick the right destination.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00002539bool llvm::FoldBranchToCommonDest(BranchInst *BI, unsigned BonusInstThreshold) {
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002540 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002541
Philip Reames6bd16b52018-08-30 00:03:02 +00002542 const unsigned PredCount = pred_size(BB);
2543
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002544 Instruction *Cond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002545 if (BI->isConditional())
2546 Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
2547 else {
2548 // For unconditional branch, check for a simple CFG pattern, where
2549 // BB has a single predecessor and BB's successor is also its predecessor's
Craig Topper36af40c2017-08-02 02:34:16 +00002550 // successor. If such pattern exists, check for CSE between BB and its
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002551 // predecessor.
2552 if (BasicBlock *PB = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
2553 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PB->getTerminator()))
2554 if (PBI->isConditional() &&
2555 (BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(0) ||
2556 BI->getSuccessor(0) == PBI->getSuccessor(1))) {
David Stenberg0af67e52018-05-18 08:52:15 +00002557 for (auto I = BB->instructionsWithoutDebug().begin(),
2558 E = BB->instructionsWithoutDebug().end();
2559 I != E;) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002560 Instruction *Curr = &*I++;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002561 if (isa<CmpInst>(Curr)) {
2562 Cond = Curr;
2563 break;
2564 }
2565 // Quit if we can't remove this instruction.
David Stenberg0af67e52018-05-18 08:52:15 +00002566 if (!tryCSEWithPredecessor(Curr, PB))
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002567 return false;
2568 }
2569 }
2570
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002571 if (!Cond)
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002572 return false;
2573 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002574
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002575 if (!Cond || (!isa<CmpInst>(Cond) && !isa<BinaryOperator>(Cond)) ||
2576 Cond->getParent() != BB || !Cond->hasOneUse())
Sanjay Patel2e002772016-03-12 18:05:53 +00002577 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002578
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002579 // Make sure the instruction after the condition is the cond branch.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002580 BasicBlock::iterator CondIt = ++Cond->getIterator();
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002581
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00002582 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002583 while (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(CondIt))
2584 ++CondIt;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002585
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002586 if (&*CondIt != BI)
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002587 return false;
Chris Lattnerea9f1d32009-01-19 23:03:13 +00002588
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002589 // Only allow this transformation if computing the condition doesn't involve
2590 // too many instructions and these involved instructions can be executed
2591 // unconditionally. We denote all involved instructions except the condition
2592 // as "bonus instructions", and only allow this transformation when the
Philip Reames6bd16b52018-08-30 00:03:02 +00002593 // number of the bonus instructions we'll need to create when cloning into
2594 // each predecessor does not exceed a certain threshold.
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002595 unsigned NumBonusInsts = 0;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithe9bc5792016-02-21 20:39:50 +00002596 for (auto I = BB->begin(); Cond != &*I; ++I) {
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002597 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
2598 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
2599 continue;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002600 if (!I->hasOneUse() || !isSafeToSpeculativelyExecute(&*I))
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002601 return false;
2602 // I has only one use and can be executed unconditionally.
2603 Instruction *User = dyn_cast<Instruction>(I->user_back());
2604 if (User == nullptr || User->getParent() != BB)
2605 return false;
2606 // I is used in the same BB. Since BI uses Cond and doesn't have more slots
2607 // to use any other instruction, User must be an instruction between next(I)
2608 // and Cond.
Philip Reames6bd16b52018-08-30 00:03:02 +00002609
2610 // Account for the cost of duplicating this instruction into each
2611 // predecessor.
2612 NumBonusInsts += PredCount;
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002613 // Early exits once we reach the limit.
2614 if (NumBonusInsts > BonusInstThreshold)
2615 return false;
2616 }
2617
Chris Lattnerea9f1d32009-01-19 23:03:13 +00002618 // Cond is known to be a compare or binary operator. Check to make sure that
2619 // neither operand is a potentially-trapping constant expression.
2620 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(0)))
2621 if (CE->canTrap())
2622 return false;
2623 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(Cond->getOperand(1)))
2624 if (CE->canTrap())
2625 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002626
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002627 // Finally, don't infinitely unroll conditional loops.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002628 BasicBlock *TrueDest = BI->getSuccessor(0);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002629 BasicBlock *FalseDest = (BI->isConditional()) ? BI->getSuccessor(1) : nullptr;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002630 if (TrueDest == BB || FalseDest == BB)
2631 return false;
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002632
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00002633 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
2634 BasicBlock *PredBlock = *PI;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002635 BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PredBlock->getTerminator());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002636
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00002637 // Check that we have two conditional branches. If there is a PHI node in
2638 // the common successor, verify that the same value flows in from both
2639 // blocks.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002640 SmallVector<PHINode *, 4> PHIs;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002641 if (!PBI || PBI->isUnconditional() ||
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002642 (BI->isConditional() && !SafeToMergeTerminators(BI, PBI)) ||
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002643 (!BI->isConditional() &&
2644 !isProfitableToFoldUnconditional(BI, PBI, Cond, PHIs)))
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002645 continue;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002646
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002647 // Determine if the two branches share a common destination.
Axel Naumann4a127062012-09-17 14:20:57 +00002648 Instruction::BinaryOps Opc = Instruction::BinaryOpsEnd;
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002649 bool InvertPredCond = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002650
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002651 if (BI->isConditional()) {
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002652 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002653 Opc = Instruction::Or;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002654 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == FalseDest) {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002655 Opc = Instruction::And;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002656 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == FalseDest) {
2657 Opc = Instruction::And;
2658 InvertPredCond = true;
2659 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == TrueDest) {
2660 Opc = Instruction::Or;
2661 InvertPredCond = true;
2662 } else {
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002663 continue;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00002664 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002665 } else {
2666 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) != TrueDest && PBI->getSuccessor(1) != TrueDest)
2667 continue;
2668 }
Chris Lattnerfba5cdf2011-04-14 02:44:53 +00002669
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00002670 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRANCH TO COMMON DEST:\n" << *PBI << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002671 IRBuilder<> Builder(PBI);
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00002672
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002673 // If we need to invert the condition in the pred block to match, do so now.
2674 if (InvertPredCond) {
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002675 Value *NewCond = PBI->getCondition();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002676
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002677 if (NewCond->hasOneUse() && isa<CmpInst>(NewCond)) {
2678 CmpInst *CI = cast<CmpInst>(NewCond);
2679 CI->setPredicate(CI->getInversePredicate());
2680 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002681 NewCond =
2682 Builder.CreateNot(NewCond, PBI->getCondition()->getName() + ".not");
Chris Lattnerfbeb5582010-12-13 07:00:06 +00002683 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002684
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002685 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
Nick Lewycky8d302df2011-12-26 20:54:14 +00002686 PBI->swapSuccessors();
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002687 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002688
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002689 // If we have bonus instructions, clone them into the predecessor block.
Sanjay Pateladb110c2015-06-24 20:07:50 +00002690 // Note that there may be multiple predecessor blocks, so we cannot move
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002691 // bonus instructions to a predecessor block.
2692 ValueToValueMapTy VMap; // maps original values to cloned values
2693 // We already make sure Cond is the last instruction before BI. Therefore,
Sanjay Pateladb110c2015-06-24 20:07:50 +00002694 // all instructions before Cond other than DbgInfoIntrinsic are bonus
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002695 // instructions.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithe9bc5792016-02-21 20:39:50 +00002696 for (auto BonusInst = BB->begin(); Cond != &*BonusInst; ++BonusInst) {
Martin Storsjo22dcddf2018-08-30 08:06:50 +00002697 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BonusInst))
2698 continue;
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002699 Instruction *NewBonusInst = BonusInst->clone();
2700 RemapInstruction(NewBonusInst, VMap,
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithda68cbc2016-04-07 00:26:43 +00002701 RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingLocals);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002702 VMap[&*BonusInst] = NewBonusInst;
Rafael Espindolaab73c492014-01-28 16:56:46 +00002703
2704 // If we moved a load, we cannot any longer claim any knowledge about
2705 // its potential value. The previous information might have been valid
2706 // only given the branch precondition.
2707 // For an analogous reason, we must also drop all the metadata whose
2708 // semantics we don't understand.
Adrian Prantlcbdfdb72015-08-20 22:00:30 +00002709 NewBonusInst->dropUnknownNonDebugMetadata();
Rafael Espindolaab73c492014-01-28 16:56:46 +00002710
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00002711 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI->getIterator(), NewBonusInst);
2712 NewBonusInst->takeName(&*BonusInst);
Jingyue Wufc029672014-09-30 22:23:38 +00002713 BonusInst->setName(BonusInst->getName() + ".old");
Owen Anderson2cfe9132010-07-14 19:52:16 +00002714 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002715
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002716 // Clone Cond into the predecessor basic block, and or/and the
2717 // two conditions together.
Philip Reamesbed55612018-08-30 00:12:29 +00002718 Instruction *CondInPred = Cond->clone();
2719 RemapInstruction(CondInPred, VMap,
Duncan P. N. Exon Smithda68cbc2016-04-07 00:26:43 +00002720 RF_NoModuleLevelChanges | RF_IgnoreMissingLocals);
Philip Reamesbed55612018-08-30 00:12:29 +00002721 PredBlock->getInstList().insert(PBI->getIterator(), CondInPred);
2722 CondInPred->takeName(Cond);
2723 Cond->setName(CondInPred->getName() + ".old");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00002724
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002725 if (BI->isConditional()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002726 Instruction *NewCond = cast<Instruction>(
Philip Reamesbed55612018-08-30 00:12:29 +00002727 Builder.CreateBinOp(Opc, PBI->getCondition(), CondInPred, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002728 PBI->setCondition(NewCond);
2729
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002730 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002731 bool HasWeights =
2732 extractPredSuccWeights(PBI, BI, PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight,
2733 SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002734 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> NewWeights;
2735
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002736 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002737 if (HasWeights) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002738 // PBI: br i1 %x, BB, FalseDest
2739 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002740 // TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002741 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002742 // FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002743 // TrueWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
2744 // We assume that total weights of a BranchInst can fit into 32 bits.
2745 // Therefore, we will not have overflow using 64-bit arithmetic.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002746 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight *
2747 (SuccFalseWeight + SuccTrueWeight) +
2748 PredTrueWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002749 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002750 AddPredecessorToBlock(TrueDest, PredBlock, BB);
2751 PBI->setSuccessor(0, TrueDest);
2752 }
2753 if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00002754 if (HasWeights) {
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002755 // PBI: br i1 %x, TrueDest, BB
2756 // BI: br i1 %y, TrueDest, FalseDest
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002757 // TrueWeight is TrueWeight for PBI * TotalWeight for BI +
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002758 // FalseWeight for PBI * TrueWeight for BI.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002759 NewWeights.push_back(PredTrueWeight *
2760 (SuccFalseWeight + SuccTrueWeight) +
2761 PredFalseWeight * SuccTrueWeight);
2762 // FalseWeight is FalseWeight for PBI * FalseWeight for BI.
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002763 NewWeights.push_back(PredFalseWeight * SuccFalseWeight);
2764 }
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002765 AddPredecessorToBlock(FalseDest, PredBlock, BB);
2766 PBI->setSuccessor(1, FalseDest);
2767 }
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002768 if (NewWeights.size() == 2) {
2769 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
2770 FitWeights(NewWeights);
2771
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002772 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(NewWeights.begin(),
2773 NewWeights.end());
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00002774 setBranchWeights(PBI, MDWeights[0], MDWeights[1]);
Manman Renbfb9d432012-09-15 00:39:57 +00002775 } else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002776 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_prof, nullptr);
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002777 } else {
2778 // Update PHI nodes in the common successors.
2779 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHIs.size(); i != e; ++i) {
Nick Lewycky0a045bb2012-06-24 10:15:42 +00002780 ConstantInt *PBI_C = cast<ConstantInt>(
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002781 PHIs[i]->getIncomingValueForBlock(PBI->getParent()));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002782 assert(PBI_C->getType()->isIntegerTy(1));
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00002783 Instruction *MergedCond = nullptr;
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002784 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == TrueDest) {
2785 // Create (PBI_Cond and PBI_C) or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2786 // PBI_C is true: PBI_Cond or (!PBI_Cond and BI_Value)
2787 // is false: !PBI_Cond and BI_Value
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002788 Instruction *NotCond = cast<Instruction>(
2789 Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(), "not.cond"));
2790 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(
Philip Reamesbed55612018-08-30 00:12:29 +00002791 Builder.CreateBinOp(Instruction::And, NotCond, CondInPred,
2792 "and.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002793 if (PBI_C->isOne())
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002794 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
2795 Instruction::Or, PBI->getCondition(), MergedCond, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002796 } else {
2797 // Create (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond and PBI_C)
2798 // PBI_C is true: (PBI_Cond and BI_Value) or (!PBI_Cond)
2799 // is false: PBI_Cond and BI_Value
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002800 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
Philip Reamesbed55612018-08-30 00:12:29 +00002801 Instruction::And, PBI->getCondition(), CondInPred, "and.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002802 if (PBI_C->isOne()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002803 Instruction *NotCond = cast<Instruction>(
2804 Builder.CreateNot(PBI->getCondition(), "not.cond"));
2805 MergedCond = cast<Instruction>(Builder.CreateBinOp(
2806 Instruction::Or, NotCond, MergedCond, "or.cond"));
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00002807 }
2808 }
2809 // Update PHI Node.
2810 PHIs[i]->setIncomingValue(PHIs[i]->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent()),
2811 MergedCond);
2812 }
2813 // Change PBI from Conditional to Unconditional.
2814 BranchInst *New_PBI = BranchInst::Create(TrueDest, PBI);
2815 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(PBI);
2816 PBI = New_PBI;
Chris Lattner55eaae12008-07-13 21:20:19 +00002817 }
Devang Pateld715ec82011-04-06 22:37:20 +00002818
Michael Kuperstein3ca147e2016-12-16 21:23:59 +00002819 // If BI was a loop latch, it may have had associated loop metadata.
2820 // We need to copy it to the new latch, that is, PBI.
2821 if (MDNode *LoopMD = BI->getMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_loop))
2822 PBI->setMetadata(LLVMContext::MD_loop, LoopMD);
2823
Nick Lewyckyc554a9b2011-12-27 04:31:52 +00002824 // TODO: If BB is reachable from all paths through PredBlock, then we
2825 // could replace PBI's branch probabilities with BI's.
Martin Storsjo22dcddf2018-08-30 08:06:50 +00002826
2827 // Copy any debug value intrinsics into the end of PredBlock.
2828 for (Instruction &I : *BB)
2829 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
2830 I.clone()->insertBefore(PBI);
2831
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00002832 return true;
Chris Lattner2e25b8f2008-07-13 21:12:01 +00002833 }
2834 return false;
2835}
2836
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002837// If there is only one store in BB1 and BB2, return it, otherwise return
2838// nullptr.
2839static StoreInst *findUniqueStoreInBlocks(BasicBlock *BB1, BasicBlock *BB2) {
2840 StoreInst *S = nullptr;
2841 for (auto *BB : {BB1, BB2}) {
2842 if (!BB)
2843 continue;
2844 for (auto &I : *BB)
2845 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I)) {
2846 if (S)
2847 // Multiple stores seen.
2848 return nullptr;
2849 else
2850 S = SI;
2851 }
2852 }
2853 return S;
2854}
2855
2856static Value *ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(Value *V, BasicBlock *BB,
2857 Value *AlternativeV = nullptr) {
2858 // PHI is going to be a PHI node that allows the value V that is defined in
2859 // BB to be referenced in BB's only successor.
2860 //
2861 // If AlternativeV is nullptr, the only value we care about in PHI is V. It
2862 // doesn't matter to us what the other operand is (it'll never get used). We
2863 // could just create a new PHI with an undef incoming value, but that could
2864 // increase register pressure if EarlyCSE/InstCombine can't fold it with some
2865 // other PHI. So here we directly look for some PHI in BB's successor with V
2866 // as an incoming operand. If we find one, we use it, else we create a new
2867 // one.
2868 //
2869 // If AlternativeV is not nullptr, we care about both incoming values in PHI.
2870 // PHI must be exactly: phi <ty> [ %BB, %V ], [ %OtherBB, %AlternativeV]
2871 // where OtherBB is the single other predecessor of BB's only successor.
2872 PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
2873 BasicBlock *Succ = BB->getSingleSuccessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002874
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002875 for (auto I = Succ->begin(); isa<PHINode>(I); ++I)
2876 if (cast<PHINode>(I)->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB) == V) {
2877 PHI = cast<PHINode>(I);
2878 if (!AlternativeV)
2879 break;
2880
Vedant Kumare0b5f862018-05-10 23:01:54 +00002881 assert(pred_size(Succ) == 2);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002882 auto PredI = pred_begin(Succ);
2883 BasicBlock *OtherPredBB = *PredI == BB ? *++PredI : *PredI;
2884 if (PHI->getIncomingValueForBlock(OtherPredBB) == AlternativeV)
2885 break;
2886 PHI = nullptr;
2887 }
2888 if (PHI)
2889 return PHI;
2890
James Molloy3d21dcf2015-12-16 14:12:44 +00002891 // If V is not an instruction defined in BB, just return it.
2892 if (!AlternativeV &&
2893 (!isa<Instruction>(V) || cast<Instruction>(V)->getParent() != BB))
2894 return V;
2895
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00002896 PHI = PHINode::Create(V->getType(), 2, "simplifycfg.merge", &Succ->front());
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002897 PHI->addIncoming(V, BB);
2898 for (BasicBlock *PredBB : predecessors(Succ))
2899 if (PredBB != BB)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002900 PHI->addIncoming(
2901 AlternativeV ? AlternativeV : UndefValue::get(V->getType()), PredBB);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002902 return PHI;
2903}
2904
2905static bool mergeConditionalStoreToAddress(BasicBlock *PTB, BasicBlock *PFB,
2906 BasicBlock *QTB, BasicBlock *QFB,
2907 BasicBlock *PostBB, Value *Address,
Alexey Bataev978e2e42017-08-29 20:06:24 +00002908 bool InvertPCond, bool InvertQCond,
2909 const DataLayout &DL) {
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002910 auto IsaBitcastOfPointerType = [](const Instruction &I) {
2911 return Operator::getOpcode(&I) == Instruction::BitCast &&
2912 I.getType()->isPointerTy();
2913 };
2914
2915 // If we're not in aggressive mode, we only optimize if we have some
2916 // confidence that by optimizing we'll allow P and/or Q to be if-converted.
2917 auto IsWorthwhile = [&](BasicBlock *BB) {
2918 if (!BB)
2919 return true;
2920 // Heuristic: if the block can be if-converted/phi-folded and the
2921 // instructions inside are all cheap (arithmetic/GEPs), it's worthwhile to
2922 // thread this store.
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002923 unsigned N = 0;
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00002924 for (auto &I : BB->instructionsWithoutDebug()) {
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002925 // Cheap instructions viable for folding.
2926 if (isa<BinaryOperator>(I) || isa<GetElementPtrInst>(I) ||
2927 isa<StoreInst>(I))
2928 ++N;
2929 // Free instructions.
Chandler Carruth9ae926b2018-08-26 09:51:22 +00002930 else if (I.isTerminator() || IsaBitcastOfPointerType(I))
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002931 continue;
2932 else
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002933 return false;
James Molloy9e959ac2015-11-05 08:40:19 +00002934 }
Craig Topper12463772017-11-03 21:08:13 +00002935 // The store we want to merge is counted in N, so add 1 to make sure
2936 // we're counting the instructions that would be left.
2937 return N <= (PHINodeFoldingThreshold + 1);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002938 };
2939
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00002940 if (!MergeCondStoresAggressively &&
2941 (!IsWorthwhile(PTB) || !IsWorthwhile(PFB) || !IsWorthwhile(QTB) ||
2942 !IsWorthwhile(QFB)))
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00002943 return false;
2944
2945 // For every pointer, there must be exactly two stores, one coming from
2946 // PTB or PFB, and the other from QTB or QFB. We don't support more than one
2947 // store (to any address) in PTB,PFB or QTB,QFB.
2948 // FIXME: We could relax this restriction with a bit more work and performance
2949 // testing.
2950 StoreInst *PStore = findUniqueStoreInBlocks(PTB, PFB);
2951 StoreInst *QStore = findUniqueStoreInBlocks(QTB, QFB);
2952 if (!PStore || !QStore)
2953 return false;
2954
2955 // Now check the stores are compatible.
2956 if (!QStore->isUnordered() || !PStore->isUnordered())
2957 return false;
2958
2959 // Check that sinking the store won't cause program behavior changes. Sinking
2960 // the store out of the Q blocks won't change any behavior as we're sinking
2961 // from a block to its unconditional successor. But we're moving a store from
2962 // the P blocks down through the middle block (QBI) and past both QFB and QTB.
2963 // So we need to check that there are no aliasing loads or stores in
2964 // QBI, QTB and QFB. We also need to check there are no conflicting memory
2965 // operations between PStore and the end of its parent block.
2966 //
2967 // The ideal way to do this is to query AliasAnalysis, but we don't
2968 // preserve AA currently so that is dangerous. Be super safe and just
2969 // check there are no other memory operations at all.
2970 for (auto &I : *QFB->getSinglePredecessor())
2971 if (I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2972 return false;
2973 for (auto &I : *QFB)
2974 if (&I != QStore && I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2975 return false;
2976 if (QTB)
2977 for (auto &I : *QTB)
2978 if (&I != QStore && I.mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2979 return false;
2980 for (auto I = BasicBlock::iterator(PStore), E = PStore->getParent()->end();
2981 I != E; ++I)
2982 if (&*I != PStore && I->mayReadOrWriteMemory())
2983 return false;
2984
Craig Topper7d3aba62018-04-04 03:47:17 +00002985 // If PostBB has more than two predecessors, we need to split it so we can
2986 // sink the store.
2987 if (std::next(pred_begin(PostBB), 2) != pred_end(PostBB)) {
2988 // We know that QFB's only successor is PostBB. And QFB has a single
2989 // predecessor. If QTB exists, then its only successor is also PostBB.
2990 // If QTB does not exist, then QFB's only predecessor has a conditional
2991 // branch to QFB and PostBB.
2992 BasicBlock *TruePred = QTB ? QTB : QFB->getSinglePredecessor();
2993 BasicBlock *NewBB = SplitBlockPredecessors(PostBB, { QFB, TruePred},
2994 "condstore.split");
2995 if (!NewBB)
2996 return false;
2997 PostBB = NewBB;
2998 }
2999
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003000 // OK, we're going to sink the stores to PostBB. The store has to be
3001 // conditional though, so first create the predicate.
3002 Value *PCond = cast<BranchInst>(PFB->getSinglePredecessor()->getTerminator())
3003 ->getCondition();
3004 Value *QCond = cast<BranchInst>(QFB->getSinglePredecessor()->getTerminator())
3005 ->getCondition();
3006
3007 Value *PPHI = ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(PStore->getValueOperand(),
3008 PStore->getParent());
3009 Value *QPHI = ensureValueAvailableInSuccessor(QStore->getValueOperand(),
3010 QStore->getParent(), PPHI);
3011
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00003012 IRBuilder<> QB(&*PostBB->getFirstInsertionPt());
3013
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003014 Value *PPred = PStore->getParent() == PTB ? PCond : QB.CreateNot(PCond);
3015 Value *QPred = QStore->getParent() == QTB ? QCond : QB.CreateNot(QCond);
3016
3017 if (InvertPCond)
3018 PPred = QB.CreateNot(PPred);
3019 if (InvertQCond)
3020 QPred = QB.CreateNot(QPred);
3021 Value *CombinedPred = QB.CreateOr(PPred, QPred);
3022
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith83c4b682015-11-07 00:01:16 +00003023 auto *T =
3024 SplitBlockAndInsertIfThen(CombinedPred, &*QB.GetInsertPoint(), false);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003025 QB.SetInsertPoint(T);
3026 StoreInst *SI = cast<StoreInst>(QB.CreateStore(QPHI, Address));
3027 AAMDNodes AAMD;
3028 PStore->getAAMetadata(AAMD, /*Merge=*/false);
3029 PStore->getAAMetadata(AAMD, /*Merge=*/true);
3030 SI->setAAMetadata(AAMD);
Alexey Bataev978e2e42017-08-29 20:06:24 +00003031 unsigned PAlignment = PStore->getAlignment();
3032 unsigned QAlignment = QStore->getAlignment();
3033 unsigned TypeAlignment =
3034 DL.getABITypeAlignment(SI->getValueOperand()->getType());
3035 unsigned MinAlignment;
3036 unsigned MaxAlignment;
3037 std::tie(MinAlignment, MaxAlignment) = std::minmax(PAlignment, QAlignment);
3038 // Choose the minimum alignment. If we could prove both stores execute, we
3039 // could use biggest one. In this case, though, we only know that one of the
3040 // stores executes. And we don't know it's safe to take the alignment from a
3041 // store that doesn't execute.
3042 if (MinAlignment != 0) {
3043 // Choose the minimum of all non-zero alignments.
3044 SI->setAlignment(MinAlignment);
3045 } else if (MaxAlignment != 0) {
3046 // Choose the minimal alignment between the non-zero alignment and the ABI
3047 // default alignment for the type of the stored value.
3048 SI->setAlignment(std::min(MaxAlignment, TypeAlignment));
3049 } else {
3050 // If both alignments are zero, use ABI default alignment for the type of
3051 // the stored value.
3052 SI->setAlignment(TypeAlignment);
3053 }
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003054
3055 QStore->eraseFromParent();
3056 PStore->eraseFromParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003057
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003058 return true;
3059}
3060
Alexey Bataev978e2e42017-08-29 20:06:24 +00003061static bool mergeConditionalStores(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *QBI,
3062 const DataLayout &DL) {
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003063 // The intention here is to find diamonds or triangles (see below) where each
3064 // conditional block contains a store to the same address. Both of these
3065 // stores are conditional, so they can't be unconditionally sunk. But it may
3066 // be profitable to speculatively sink the stores into one merged store at the
3067 // end, and predicate the merged store on the union of the two conditions of
3068 // PBI and QBI.
3069 //
3070 // This can reduce the number of stores executed if both of the conditions are
3071 // true, and can allow the blocks to become small enough to be if-converted.
3072 // This optimization will also chain, so that ladders of test-and-set
3073 // sequences can be if-converted away.
3074 //
3075 // We only deal with simple diamonds or triangles:
3076 //
3077 // PBI or PBI or a combination of the two
3078 // / \ | \
3079 // PTB PFB | PFB
3080 // \ / | /
3081 // QBI QBI
3082 // / \ | \
3083 // QTB QFB | QFB
3084 // \ / | /
3085 // PostBB PostBB
3086 //
3087 // We model triangles as a type of diamond with a nullptr "true" block.
3088 // Triangles are canonicalized so that the fallthrough edge is represented by
3089 // a true condition, as in the diagram above.
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003090 BasicBlock *PTB = PBI->getSuccessor(0);
3091 BasicBlock *PFB = PBI->getSuccessor(1);
3092 BasicBlock *QTB = QBI->getSuccessor(0);
3093 BasicBlock *QFB = QBI->getSuccessor(1);
3094 BasicBlock *PostBB = QFB->getSingleSuccessor();
3095
Craig Topper7af07882017-04-21 15:53:42 +00003096 // Make sure we have a good guess for PostBB. If QTB's only successor is
3097 // QFB, then QFB is a better PostBB.
3098 if (QTB->getSingleSuccessor() == QFB)
3099 PostBB = QFB;
3100
3101 // If we couldn't find a good PostBB, stop.
3102 if (!PostBB)
3103 return false;
3104
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003105 bool InvertPCond = false, InvertQCond = false;
3106 // Canonicalize fallthroughs to the true branches.
3107 if (PFB == QBI->getParent()) {
3108 std::swap(PFB, PTB);
3109 InvertPCond = true;
3110 }
3111 if (QFB == PostBB) {
3112 std::swap(QFB, QTB);
3113 InvertQCond = true;
3114 }
3115
3116 // From this point on we can assume PTB or QTB may be fallthroughs but PFB
3117 // and QFB may not. Model fallthroughs as a nullptr block.
3118 if (PTB == QBI->getParent())
3119 PTB = nullptr;
3120 if (QTB == PostBB)
3121 QTB = nullptr;
3122
3123 // Legality bailouts. We must have at least the non-fallthrough blocks and
3124 // the post-dominating block, and the non-fallthroughs must only have one
3125 // predecessor.
3126 auto HasOnePredAndOneSucc = [](BasicBlock *BB, BasicBlock *P, BasicBlock *S) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003127 return BB->getSinglePredecessor() == P && BB->getSingleSuccessor() == S;
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003128 };
Craig Topper7af07882017-04-21 15:53:42 +00003129 if (!HasOnePredAndOneSucc(PFB, PBI->getParent(), QBI->getParent()) ||
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003130 !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(QFB, QBI->getParent(), PostBB))
3131 return false;
3132 if ((PTB && !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(PTB, PBI->getParent(), QBI->getParent())) ||
3133 (QTB && !HasOnePredAndOneSucc(QTB, QBI->getParent(), PostBB)))
3134 return false;
Craig Topper7d3aba62018-04-04 03:47:17 +00003135 if (!QBI->getParent()->hasNUses(2))
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003136 return false;
3137
3138 // OK, this is a sequence of two diamonds or triangles.
3139 // Check if there are stores in PTB or PFB that are repeated in QTB or QFB.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003140 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 4> PStoreAddresses, QStoreAddresses;
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003141 for (auto *BB : {PTB, PFB}) {
3142 if (!BB)
3143 continue;
3144 for (auto &I : *BB)
3145 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
3146 PStoreAddresses.insert(SI->getPointerOperand());
3147 }
3148 for (auto *BB : {QTB, QFB}) {
3149 if (!BB)
3150 continue;
3151 for (auto &I : *BB)
3152 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(&I))
3153 QStoreAddresses.insert(SI->getPointerOperand());
3154 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003155
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003156 set_intersect(PStoreAddresses, QStoreAddresses);
3157 // set_intersect mutates PStoreAddresses in place. Rename it here to make it
3158 // clear what it contains.
3159 auto &CommonAddresses = PStoreAddresses;
3160
3161 bool Changed = false;
3162 for (auto *Address : CommonAddresses)
3163 Changed |= mergeConditionalStoreToAddress(
Alexey Bataev978e2e42017-08-29 20:06:24 +00003164 PTB, PFB, QTB, QFB, PostBB, Address, InvertPCond, InvertQCond, DL);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003165 return Changed;
3166}
3167
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003168/// If we have a conditional branch as a predecessor of another block,
3169/// this function tries to simplify it. We know
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003170/// that PBI and BI are both conditional branches, and BI is in one of the
3171/// successor blocks of PBI - PBI branches to BI.
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00003172static bool SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(BranchInst *PBI, BranchInst *BI,
3173 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003174 assert(PBI->isConditional() && BI->isConditional());
3175 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Dan Gohman5476cfd2009-08-12 16:23:25 +00003176
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003177 // If this block ends with a branch instruction, and if there is a
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003178 // predecessor that ends on a branch of the same condition, make
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003179 // this conditional branch redundant.
3180 if (PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
3181 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3182 // Okay, the outcome of this conditional branch is statically
3183 // knowable. If this block had a single pred, handle specially.
3184 if (BB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
3185 // Turn this into a branch on constant.
3186 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003187 BI->setCondition(
3188 ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), CondIsTrue));
3189 return true; // Nuke the branch on constant.
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003190 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003191
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003192 // Otherwise, if there are multiple predecessors, insert a PHI that merges
3193 // in the constant and simplify the block result. Subsequent passes of
3194 // simplifycfg will thread the block.
3195 if (BlockIsSimpleEnoughToThreadThrough(BB)) {
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00003196 pred_iterator PB = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB);
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003197 PHINode *NewPN = PHINode::Create(
3198 Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), std::distance(PB, PE),
3199 BI->getCondition()->getName() + ".pr", &BB->front());
Chris Lattner5eed3722008-07-13 21:55:46 +00003200 // Okay, we're going to insert the PHI node. Since PBI is not the only
3201 // predecessor, compute the PHI'd conditional value for all of the preds.
3202 // Any predecessor where the condition is not computable we keep symbolic.
Jay Foade0938d82011-03-30 11:19:20 +00003203 for (pred_iterator PI = PB; PI != PE; ++PI) {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00003204 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003205 if ((PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(P->getTerminator())) && PBI != BI &&
3206 PBI->isConditional() && PBI->getCondition() == BI->getCondition() &&
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003207 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3208 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003209 NewPN->addIncoming(
3210 ConstantInt::get(Type::getInt1Ty(BB->getContext()), CondIsTrue),
3211 P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003212 } else {
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00003213 NewPN->addIncoming(BI->getCondition(), P);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003214 }
Gabor Greif8629f122010-07-12 10:59:23 +00003215 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003216
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003217 BI->setCondition(NewPN);
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003218 return true;
3219 }
3220 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003221
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00003222 if (auto *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BI->getCondition()))
3223 if (CE->canTrap())
3224 return false;
3225
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003226 // If both branches are conditional and both contain stores to the same
3227 // address, remove the stores from the conditionals and create a conditional
3228 // merged store at the end.
Alexey Bataev978e2e42017-08-29 20:06:24 +00003229 if (MergeCondStores && mergeConditionalStores(PBI, BI, DL))
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003230 return true;
3231
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003232 // If this is a conditional branch in an empty block, and if any
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00003233 // predecessors are a conditional branch to one of our destinations,
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003234 // fold the conditions into logical ops and one cond br.
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00003235
Zhou Sheng264e46e2009-02-26 06:56:37 +00003236 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00003237 if (&*BB->instructionsWithoutDebug().begin() != BI)
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003238 return false;
Chris Lattnerc59945b2009-01-20 01:15:41 +00003239
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003240 int PBIOp, BIOp;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00003241 if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
3242 PBIOp = 0;
3243 BIOp = 0;
3244 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3245 PBIOp = 0;
3246 BIOp = 1;
3247 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(0)) {
3248 PBIOp = 1;
3249 BIOp = 0;
3250 } else if (PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BI->getSuccessor(1)) {
3251 PBIOp = 1;
3252 BIOp = 1;
3253 } else {
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003254 return false;
Richard Trieu7a083812016-02-18 22:09:30 +00003255 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003256
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003257 // Check to make sure that the other destination of this branch
3258 // isn't BB itself. If so, this is an infinite loop that will
3259 // keep getting unwound.
3260 if (PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp) == BB)
3261 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003262
3263 // Do not perform this transformation if it would require
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003264 // insertion of a large number of select instructions. For targets
3265 // without predication/cmovs, this is a big pessimization.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003266
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00003267 // Also do not perform this transformation if any phi node in the common
3268 // destination block can trap when reached by BB or PBB (PR17073). In that
3269 // case, it would be unsafe to hoist the operation into a select instruction.
3270
3271 BasicBlock *CommonDest = PBI->getSuccessor(PBIOp);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003272 unsigned NumPhis = 0;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003273 for (BasicBlock::iterator II = CommonDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(II);
3274 ++II, ++NumPhis) {
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003275 if (NumPhis > 2) // Disable this xform.
3276 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003277
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00003278 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(II);
3279 Value *BIV = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
3280 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(BIV))
3281 if (CE->canTrap())
3282 return false;
3283
3284 unsigned PBBIdx = PN->getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
3285 Value *PBIV = PN->getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
3286 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(PBIV))
3287 if (CE->canTrap())
3288 return false;
3289 }
3290
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003291 // Finally, if everything is ok, fold the branches to logical ops.
Sanjay Patela932da82014-07-07 21:19:00 +00003292 BasicBlock *OtherDest = BI->getSuccessor(BIOp ^ 1);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003293
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00003294 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING BRs:" << *PBI->getParent()
3295 << "AND: " << *BI->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003296
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00003297 // If OtherDest *is* BB, then BB is a basic block with a single conditional
3298 // branch in it, where one edge (OtherDest) goes back to itself but the other
3299 // exits. We don't *know* that the program avoids the infinite loop
3300 // (even though that seems likely). If we do this xform naively, we'll end up
3301 // recursively unpeeling the loop. Since we know that (after the xform is
3302 // done) that the block *is* infinite if reached, we just make it an obviously
3303 // infinite loop with no cond branch.
3304 if (OtherDest == BB) {
3305 // Insert it at the end of the function, because it's either code,
3306 // or it won't matter if it's hot. :)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003307 BasicBlock *InfLoopBlock =
3308 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "infloop", BB->getParent());
Chris Lattner80b03a12008-07-13 22:23:11 +00003309 BranchInst::Create(InfLoopBlock, InfLoopBlock);
3310 OtherDest = InfLoopBlock;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003311 }
3312
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00003313 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003314
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003315 // BI may have other predecessors. Because of this, we leave
3316 // it alone, but modify PBI.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003317
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003318 // Make sure we get to CommonDest on True&True directions.
3319 Value *PBICond = PBI->getCondition();
Mehdi Aminiba9fba82016-03-13 21:05:13 +00003320 IRBuilder<NoFolder> Builder(PBI);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003321 if (PBIOp)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003322 PBICond = Builder.CreateNot(PBICond, PBICond->getName() + ".not");
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003323
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003324 Value *BICond = BI->getCondition();
3325 if (BIOp)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003326 BICond = Builder.CreateNot(BICond, BICond->getName() + ".not");
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003327
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003328 // Merge the conditions.
Devang Patel1407fb42011-05-19 20:52:46 +00003329 Value *Cond = Builder.CreateOr(PBICond, BICond, "brmerge");
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003330
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003331 // Modify PBI to branch on the new condition to the new dests.
3332 PBI->setCondition(Cond);
3333 PBI->setSuccessor(0, CommonDest);
3334 PBI->setSuccessor(1, OtherDest);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003335
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003336 // Update branch weight for PBI.
3337 uint64_t PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight, SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight;
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00003338 uint64_t PredCommon, PredOther, SuccCommon, SuccOther;
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00003339 bool HasWeights =
3340 extractPredSuccWeights(PBI, BI, PredTrueWeight, PredFalseWeight,
3341 SuccTrueWeight, SuccFalseWeight);
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00003342 if (HasWeights) {
Dehao Chenb76e5d92016-05-10 23:07:19 +00003343 PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight;
3344 PredOther = PBIOp ? PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight;
3345 SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight;
3346 SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight;
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003347 // The weight to CommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal +
3348 // PredOther * SuccCommon.
3349 // The weight to OtherDest should be PredOther * SuccOther.
Benjamin Kramerea68a942015-02-19 15:26:17 +00003350 uint64_t NewWeights[2] = {PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther) +
3351 PredOther * SuccCommon,
3352 PredOther * SuccOther};
Sanjay Patel84a0bf62016-05-06 17:51:37 +00003353 // Halve the weights if any of them cannot fit in an uint32_t
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003354 FitWeights(NewWeights);
3355
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00003356 setBranchWeights(PBI, NewWeights[0], NewWeights[1]);
Manman Ren2d4c10f2012-09-17 21:30:40 +00003357 }
3358
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003359 // OtherDest may have phi nodes. If so, add an entry from PBI's
3360 // block that are identical to the entries for BI's block.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00003361 AddPredecessorToBlock(OtherDest, PBI->getParent(), BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003362
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003363 // We know that the CommonDest already had an edge from PBI to
3364 // it. If it has PHIs though, the PHIs may have different
3365 // entries for BB and PBI's BB. If so, insert a select to make
3366 // them agree.
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00003367 for (PHINode &PN : CommonDest->phis()) {
3368 Value *BIV = PN.getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
3369 unsigned PBBIdx = PN.getBasicBlockIndex(PBI->getParent());
3370 Value *PBIV = PN.getIncomingValue(PBBIdx);
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003371 if (BIV != PBIV) {
3372 // Insert a select in PBI to pick the right value.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003373 SelectInst *NV = cast<SelectInst>(
3374 Builder.CreateSelect(PBICond, PBIV, BIV, PBIV->getName() + ".mux"));
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00003375 PN.setIncomingValue(PBBIdx, NV);
Sanjay Patel1cb62412016-05-06 18:07:46 +00003376 // Although the select has the same condition as PBI, the original branch
3377 // weights for PBI do not apply to the new select because the select's
3378 // 'logical' edges are incoming edges of the phi that is eliminated, not
3379 // the outgoing edges of PBI.
Dehao Chenf16376b2016-05-18 22:41:03 +00003380 if (HasWeights) {
Sanjay Patel1cb62412016-05-06 18:07:46 +00003381 uint64_t PredCommon = PBIOp ? PredFalseWeight : PredTrueWeight;
3382 uint64_t PredOther = PBIOp ? PredTrueWeight : PredFalseWeight;
3383 uint64_t SuccCommon = BIOp ? SuccFalseWeight : SuccTrueWeight;
3384 uint64_t SuccOther = BIOp ? SuccTrueWeight : SuccFalseWeight;
3385 // The weight to PredCommonDest should be PredCommon * SuccTotal.
3386 // The weight to PredOtherDest should be PredOther * SuccCommon.
3387 uint64_t NewWeights[2] = {PredCommon * (SuccCommon + SuccOther),
3388 PredOther * SuccCommon};
3389
3390 FitWeights(NewWeights);
3391
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00003392 setBranchWeights(NV, NewWeights[0], NewWeights[1]);
Sanjay Patel1cb62412016-05-06 18:07:46 +00003393 }
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003394 }
3395 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003396
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00003397 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "INTO: " << *PBI->getParent());
3398 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << *PBI->getParent()->getParent());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003399
Chris Lattner834ab4e2008-07-13 22:04:41 +00003400 // This basic block is probably dead. We know it has at least
3401 // one fewer predecessor.
3402 return true;
Chris Lattner9aada1d2008-07-13 21:53:26 +00003403}
3404
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003405// Simplifies a terminator by replacing it with a branch to TrueBB if Cond is
3406// true or to FalseBB if Cond is false.
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003407// Takes care of updating the successors and removing the old terminator.
3408// Also makes sure not to introduce new successors by assuming that edges to
3409// non-successor TrueBBs and FalseBBs aren't reachable.
3410static bool SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(TerminatorInst *OldTerm, Value *Cond,
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003411 BasicBlock *TrueBB, BasicBlock *FalseBB,
3412 uint32_t TrueWeight,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003413 uint32_t FalseWeight) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003414 // Remove any superfluous successor edges from the CFG.
3415 // First, figure out which successors to preserve.
3416 // If TrueBB and FalseBB are equal, only try to preserve one copy of that
3417 // successor.
3418 BasicBlock *KeepEdge1 = TrueBB;
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003419 BasicBlock *KeepEdge2 = TrueBB != FalseBB ? FalseBB : nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003420
3421 // Then remove the rest.
Chandler Carruth96fc1de2018-08-26 08:41:15 +00003422 for (BasicBlock *Succ : successors(OldTerm)) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003423 // Make sure only to keep exactly one copy of each edge.
3424 if (Succ == KeepEdge1)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003425 KeepEdge1 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003426 else if (Succ == KeepEdge2)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003427 KeepEdge2 = nullptr;
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003428 else
David Majnemerdc3b67b2015-10-21 18:22:24 +00003429 Succ->removePredecessor(OldTerm->getParent(),
3430 /*DontDeleteUselessPHIs=*/true);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003431 }
3432
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003433 IRBuilder<> Builder(OldTerm);
3434 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(OldTerm->getDebugLoc());
3435
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003436 // Insert an appropriate new terminator.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003437 if (!KeepEdge1 && !KeepEdge2) {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003438 if (TrueBB == FalseBB)
3439 // We were only looking for one successor, and it was present.
3440 // Create an unconditional branch to it.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003441 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003442 else {
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003443 // We found both of the successors we were looking for.
3444 // Create a conditional branch sharing the condition of the select.
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003445 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cond, TrueBB, FalseBB);
3446 if (TrueWeight != FalseWeight)
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00003447 setBranchWeights(NewBI, TrueWeight, FalseWeight);
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003448 }
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003449 } else if (KeepEdge1 && (KeepEdge2 || TrueBB == FalseBB)) {
3450 // Neither of the selected blocks were successors, so this
3451 // terminator must be unreachable.
3452 new UnreachableInst(OldTerm->getContext(), OldTerm);
3453 } else {
3454 // One of the selected values was a successor, but the other wasn't.
3455 // Insert an unconditional branch to the one that was found;
3456 // the edge to the one that wasn't must be unreachable.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003457 if (!KeepEdge1)
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003458 // Only TrueBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003459 Builder.CreateBr(TrueBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003460 else
3461 // Only FalseBB was found.
Devang Patel2c2ea222011-05-18 18:43:31 +00003462 Builder.CreateBr(FalseBB);
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003463 }
3464
3465 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(OldTerm);
3466 return true;
3467}
3468
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003469// Replaces
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003470// (switch (select cond, X, Y)) on constant X, Y
3471// with a branch - conditional if X and Y lead to distinct BBs,
3472// unconditional otherwise.
3473static bool SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SwitchInst *SI, SelectInst *Select) {
3474 // Check for constant integer values in the select.
3475 ConstantInt *TrueVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getTrueValue());
3476 ConstantInt *FalseVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(Select->getFalseValue());
3477 if (!TrueVal || !FalseVal)
3478 return false;
3479
3480 // Find the relevant condition and destinations.
3481 Value *Condition = Select->getCondition();
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00003482 BasicBlock *TrueBB = SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal)->getCaseSuccessor();
3483 BasicBlock *FalseBB = SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal)->getCaseSuccessor();
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003484
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003485 // Get weight for TrueBB and FalseBB.
3486 uint32_t TrueWeight = 0, FalseWeight = 0;
3487 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
3488 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
3489 if (HasWeights) {
3490 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3491 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003492 TrueWeight =
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00003493 (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(TrueVal)->getSuccessorIndex()];
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003494 FalseWeight =
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00003495 (uint32_t)Weights[SI->findCaseValue(FalseVal)->getSuccessorIndex()];
Manman Ren774246a2012-09-17 22:28:55 +00003496 }
3497 }
3498
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003499 // Perform the actual simplification.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003500 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(SI, Condition, TrueBB, FalseBB, TrueWeight,
3501 FalseWeight);
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00003502}
3503
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003504// Replaces
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00003505// (indirectbr (select cond, blockaddress(@fn, BlockA),
3506// blockaddress(@fn, BlockB)))
3507// with
3508// (br cond, BlockA, BlockB).
3509static bool SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IndirectBrInst *IBI, SelectInst *SI) {
3510 // Check that both operands of the select are block addresses.
3511 BlockAddress *TBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getTrueValue());
3512 BlockAddress *FBA = dyn_cast<BlockAddress>(SI->getFalseValue());
3513 if (!TBA || !FBA)
3514 return false;
3515
3516 // Extract the actual blocks.
3517 BasicBlock *TrueBB = TBA->getBasicBlock();
3518 BasicBlock *FalseBB = FBA->getBasicBlock();
3519
Frits van Bommel8e158492011-01-11 12:52:11 +00003520 // Perform the actual simplification.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003521 return SimplifyTerminatorOnSelect(IBI, SI->getCondition(), TrueBB, FalseBB, 0,
3522 0);
Frits van Bommel8fb69ee2010-12-05 18:29:03 +00003523}
3524
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003525/// This is called when we find an icmp instruction
3526/// (a seteq/setne with a constant) as the only instruction in a
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003527/// block that ends with an uncond branch. We are looking for a very specific
3528/// pattern that occurs when "A == 1 || A == 2 || A == 3" gets simplified. In
3529/// this case, we merge the first two "or's of icmp" into a switch, but then the
3530/// default value goes to an uncond block with a seteq in it, we get something
3531/// like:
3532///
3533/// switch i8 %A, label %DEFAULT [ i8 1, label %end i8 2, label %end ]
3534/// DEFAULT:
3535/// %tmp = icmp eq i8 %A, 92
3536/// br label %end
3537/// end:
3538/// ... = phi i1 [ true, %entry ], [ %tmp, %DEFAULT ], [ true, %entry ]
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003539///
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003540/// We prefer to split the edge to 'end' so that there is a true/false entry to
3541/// the PHI, merging the third icmp into the switch.
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00003542static bool tryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003543 ICmpInst *ICI, IRBuilder<> &Builder, const DataLayout &DL,
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00003544 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const SimplifyCFGOptions &Options) {
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003545 BasicBlock *BB = ICI->getParent();
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00003546
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003547 // If the block has any PHIs in it or the icmp has multiple uses, it is too
3548 // complex.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003549 if (isa<PHINode>(BB->begin()) || !ICI->hasOneUse())
3550 return false;
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003551
3552 Value *V = ICI->getOperand(0);
3553 ConstantInt *Cst = cast<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1));
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003554
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003555 // The pattern we're looking for is where our only predecessor is a switch on
3556 // 'V' and this block is the default case for the switch. In this case we can
3557 // fold the compared value into the switch to simplify things.
3558 BasicBlock *Pred = BB->getSinglePredecessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003559 if (!Pred || !isa<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator()))
3560 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003561
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003562 SwitchInst *SI = cast<SwitchInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
3563 if (SI->getCondition() != V)
3564 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003565
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003566 // If BB is reachable on a non-default case, then we simply know the value of
3567 // V in this block. Substitute it and constant fold the icmp instruction
3568 // away.
3569 if (SI->getDefaultDest() != BB) {
3570 ConstantInt *VVal = SI->findCaseDest(BB);
3571 assert(VVal && "Should have a unique destination value");
3572 ICI->setOperand(0, VVal);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003573
Daniel Berlin4d0fe642017-04-28 19:55:38 +00003574 if (Value *V = SimplifyInstruction(ICI, {DL, ICI})) {
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00003575 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003576 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3577 }
3578 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Justin Bogner6f1740d2018-08-20 06:37:11 +00003579 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) || true;
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003580 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003581
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003582 // Ok, the block is reachable from the default dest. If the constant we're
3583 // comparing exists in one of the other edges, then we can constant fold ICI
3584 // and zap it.
Stepan Dyatkovskiy97b02fc2012-03-11 06:09:17 +00003585 if (SI->findCaseValue(Cst) != SI->case_default()) {
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003586 Value *V;
3587 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
3588 V = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
3589 else
3590 V = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003591
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003592 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(V);
3593 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3594 // BB is now empty, so it is likely to simplify away.
Justin Bogner6f1740d2018-08-20 06:37:11 +00003595 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) || true;
Chris Lattner62cc76e2010-12-13 03:43:57 +00003596 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003597
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003598 // The use of the icmp has to be in the 'end' block, by the only PHI node in
3599 // the block.
3600 BasicBlock *SuccBlock = BB->getTerminator()->getSuccessor(0);
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00003601 PHINode *PHIUse = dyn_cast<PHINode>(ICI->user_back());
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00003602 if (PHIUse == nullptr || PHIUse != &SuccBlock->front() ||
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003603 isa<PHINode>(++BasicBlock::iterator(PHIUse)))
3604 return false;
3605
3606 // If the icmp is a SETEQ, then the default dest gets false, the new edge gets
3607 // true in the PHI.
3608 Constant *DefaultCst = ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003609 Constant *NewCst = ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003610
3611 if (ICI->getPredicate() == ICmpInst::ICMP_EQ)
3612 std::swap(DefaultCst, NewCst);
3613
3614 // Replace ICI (which is used by the PHI for the default value) with true or
3615 // false depending on if it is EQ or NE.
3616 ICI->replaceAllUsesWith(DefaultCst);
3617 ICI->eraseFromParent();
3618
3619 // Okay, the switch goes to this block on a default value. Add an edge from
3620 // the switch to the merge point on the compared value.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003621 BasicBlock *NewBB =
3622 BasicBlock::Create(BB->getContext(), "switch.edge", BB->getParent(), BB);
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003623 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
3624 bool HasWeights = HasBranchWeights(SI);
3625 if (HasWeights) {
3626 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
3627 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
3628 // Split weight for default case to case for "Cst".
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003629 Weights[0] = (Weights[0] + 1) >> 1;
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003630 Weights.push_back(Weights[0]);
3631
3632 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00003633 setBranchWeights(SI, MDWeights);
Manman Rence48ea72012-09-17 23:07:43 +00003634 }
3635 }
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003636 SI->addCase(Cst, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003637
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003638 // NewBB branches to the phi block, add the uncond branch and the phi entry.
Devang Patel767f6932011-05-18 18:28:48 +00003639 Builder.SetInsertPoint(NewBB);
3640 Builder.SetCurrentDebugLocation(SI->getDebugLoc());
3641 Builder.CreateBr(SuccBlock);
Chris Lattnerd9bacc02010-12-13 03:18:54 +00003642 PHIUse->addIncoming(NewCst, NewBB);
3643 return true;
3644}
3645
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00003646/// The specified branch is a conditional branch.
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003647/// Check to see if it is branching on an or/and chain of icmp instructions, and
3648/// fold it into a switch instruction if so.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003649static bool SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
3650 const DataLayout &DL) {
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003651 Instruction *Cond = dyn_cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003652 if (!Cond)
3653 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003654
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003655 // Change br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F into a switch instruction.
3656 // If this is a bunch of seteq's or'd together, or if it's a bunch of
3657 // 'setne's and'ed together, collect them.
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003658
Mehdi Amini9a25cb82014-11-19 20:09:11 +00003659 // Try to gather values from a chain of and/or to be turned into a switch
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003660 ConstantComparesGatherer ConstantCompare(Cond, DL);
3661 // Unpack the result
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003662 SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> &Values = ConstantCompare.Vals;
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003663 Value *CompVal = ConstantCompare.CompValue;
3664 unsigned UsedICmps = ConstantCompare.UsedICmps;
3665 Value *ExtraCase = ConstantCompare.Extra;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003666
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003667 // If we didn't have a multiply compared value, fail.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003668 if (!CompVal)
3669 return false;
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003670
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00003671 // Avoid turning single icmps into a switch.
3672 if (UsedICmps <= 1)
3673 return false;
3674
Mehdi Aminiffd01002014-11-20 22:40:25 +00003675 bool TrueWhenEqual = (Cond->getOpcode() == Instruction::Or);
3676
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003677 // There might be duplicate constants in the list, which the switch
3678 // instruction can't handle, remove them now.
3679 array_pod_sort(Values.begin(), Values.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
3680 Values.erase(std::unique(Values.begin(), Values.end()), Values.end());
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003681
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003682 // If Extra was used, we require at least two switch values to do the
Sanjay Patel59661452015-09-10 15:14:34 +00003683 // transformation. A switch with one value is just a conditional branch.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003684 if (ExtraCase && Values.size() < 2)
3685 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003686
Andrew Trick3051aa12012-08-29 21:46:38 +00003687 // TODO: Preserve branch weight metadata, similarly to how
3688 // FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors preserves it.
3689
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003690 // Figure out which block is which destination.
3691 BasicBlock *DefaultBB = BI->getSuccessor(1);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003692 BasicBlock *EdgeBB = BI->getSuccessor(0);
3693 if (!TrueWhenEqual)
3694 std::swap(DefaultBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003695
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003696 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003697
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00003698 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Converting 'icmp' chain with " << Values.size()
3699 << " cases into SWITCH. BB is:\n"
3700 << *BB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003701
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003702 // If there are any extra values that couldn't be folded into the switch
3703 // then we evaluate them with an explicit branch first. Split the block
3704 // right before the condbr to handle it.
3705 if (ExtraCase) {
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003706 BasicBlock *NewBB =
3707 BB->splitBasicBlock(BI->getIterator(), "switch.early.test");
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003708 // Remove the uncond branch added to the old block.
3709 TerminatorInst *OldTI = BB->getTerminator();
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003710 Builder.SetInsertPoint(OldTI);
3711
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00003712 if (TrueWhenEqual)
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003713 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, EdgeBB, NewBB);
Chris Lattner5a9d59d2010-12-14 05:57:30 +00003714 else
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003715 Builder.CreateCondBr(ExtraCase, NewBB, EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003716
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003717 OldTI->eraseFromParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003718
Chris Lattnercb570f82010-12-13 05:34:18 +00003719 // If there are PHI nodes in EdgeBB, then we need to add a new entry to them
3720 // for the edge we just added.
Chris Lattner0f4d67b2010-12-14 07:09:42 +00003721 AddPredecessorToBlock(EdgeBB, BB, NewBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003722
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00003723 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain unhandled condition: " << *ExtraCase
3724 << "\nEXTRABB = " << *BB);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003725 BB = NewBB;
3726 }
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003727
3728 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BI);
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003729 // Convert pointer to int before we switch.
3730 if (CompVal->getType()->isPointerTy()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00003731 CompVal = Builder.CreatePtrToInt(
3732 CompVal, DL.getIntPtrType(CompVal->getType()), "magicptr");
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003733 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003734
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003735 // Create the new switch instruction now.
Devang Patel7de6c4b2011-05-18 23:18:47 +00003736 SwitchInst *New = Builder.CreateSwitch(CompVal, DefaultBB, Values.size());
Devang Patelb849cd52011-05-17 23:29:05 +00003737
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003738 // Add all of the 'cases' to the switch instruction.
3739 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size(); i != e; ++i)
3740 New->addCase(Values[i], EdgeBB);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003741
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003742 // We added edges from PI to the EdgeBB. As such, if there were any
3743 // PHI nodes in EdgeBB, they need entries to be added corresponding to
3744 // the number of edges added.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003745 for (BasicBlock::iterator BBI = EdgeBB->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003746 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(BBI);
3747 Value *InVal = PN->getIncomingValueForBlock(BB);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003748 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Values.size() - 1; i != e; ++i)
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003749 PN->addIncoming(InVal, BB);
3750 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003751
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003752 // Erase the old branch instruction.
3753 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00003754
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00003755 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << " ** 'icmp' chain result is:\n" << *BB << '\n');
Chris Lattnera69c4432010-12-13 05:03:41 +00003756 return true;
3757}
3758
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003759bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyResume(ResumeInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003760 if (isa<PHINode>(RI->getValue()))
3761 return SimplifyCommonResume(RI);
3762 else if (isa<LandingPadInst>(RI->getParent()->getFirstNonPHI()) &&
3763 RI->getValue() == RI->getParent()->getFirstNonPHI())
3764 // The resume must unwind the exception that caused control to branch here.
3765 return SimplifySingleResume(RI);
Chen Li509ff212016-01-11 19:20:53 +00003766
3767 return false;
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003768}
3769
3770// Simplify resume that is shared by several landing pads (phi of landing pad).
3771bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCommonResume(ResumeInst *RI) {
3772 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
3773
3774 // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics
3775 // between the phi of landing pads (RI->getValue()) and resume instruction.
3776 BasicBlock::iterator I = cast<Instruction>(RI->getValue())->getIterator(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003777 E = RI->getIterator();
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003778 while (++I != E)
3779 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
3780 return false;
3781
Mandeep Singh Grang799a2ed2017-04-24 19:20:45 +00003782 SmallSetVector<BasicBlock *, 4> TrivialUnwindBlocks;
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003783 auto *PhiLPInst = cast<PHINode>(RI->getValue());
3784
3785 // Check incoming blocks to see if any of them are trivial.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003786 for (unsigned Idx = 0, End = PhiLPInst->getNumIncomingValues(); Idx != End;
3787 Idx++) {
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003788 auto *IncomingBB = PhiLPInst->getIncomingBlock(Idx);
3789 auto *IncomingValue = PhiLPInst->getIncomingValue(Idx);
3790
3791 // If the block has other successors, we can not delete it because
3792 // it has other dependents.
3793 if (IncomingBB->getUniqueSuccessor() != BB)
3794 continue;
3795
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003796 auto *LandingPad = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(IncomingBB->getFirstNonPHI());
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003797 // Not the landing pad that caused the control to branch here.
3798 if (IncomingValue != LandingPad)
3799 continue;
3800
3801 bool isTrivial = true;
3802
3803 I = IncomingBB->getFirstNonPHI()->getIterator();
3804 E = IncomingBB->getTerminator()->getIterator();
3805 while (++I != E)
3806 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I)) {
3807 isTrivial = false;
3808 break;
3809 }
3810
3811 if (isTrivial)
3812 TrivialUnwindBlocks.insert(IncomingBB);
3813 }
3814
3815 // If no trivial unwind blocks, don't do any simplifications.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003816 if (TrivialUnwindBlocks.empty())
3817 return false;
Chen Li1689c2f2016-01-10 05:48:01 +00003818
3819 // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls.
3820 for (auto *TrivialBB : TrivialUnwindBlocks) {
3821 // Blocks that will be simplified should be removed from the phi node.
3822 // Note there could be multiple edges to the resume block, and we need
3823 // to remove them all.
3824 while (PhiLPInst->getBasicBlockIndex(TrivialBB) != -1)
3825 BB->removePredecessor(TrivialBB, true);
3826
3827 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(TrivialBB), PE = pred_end(TrivialBB);
3828 PI != PE;) {
3829 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI++;
3830 removeUnwindEdge(Pred);
3831 }
3832
3833 // In each SimplifyCFG run, only the current processed block can be erased.
3834 // Otherwise, it will break the iteration of SimplifyCFG pass. So instead
3835 // of erasing TrivialBB, we only remove the branch to the common resume
3836 // block so that we can later erase the resume block since it has no
3837 // predecessors.
3838 TrivialBB->getTerminator()->eraseFromParent();
3839 new UnreachableInst(RI->getContext(), TrivialBB);
3840 }
3841
3842 // Delete the resume block if all its predecessors have been removed.
3843 if (pred_empty(BB))
3844 BB->eraseFromParent();
3845
3846 return !TrivialUnwindBlocks.empty();
3847}
3848
3849// Simplify resume that is only used by a single (non-phi) landing pad.
3850bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifySingleResume(ResumeInst *RI) {
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003851 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
3852 LandingPadInst *LPInst = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(BB->getFirstNonPHI());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003853 assert(RI->getValue() == LPInst &&
3854 "Resume must unwind the exception that caused control to here");
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003855
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003856 // Check that there are no other instructions except for debug intrinsics.
3857 BasicBlock::iterator I = LPInst->getIterator(), E = RI->getIterator();
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003858 while (++I != E)
3859 if (!isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I))
3860 return false;
3861
Chen Lic6e28782015-10-22 20:48:38 +00003862 // Turn all invokes that unwind here into calls and delete the basic block.
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003863 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE;) {
3864 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI++;
3865 removeUnwindEdge(Pred);
Chen Lic6e28782015-10-22 20:48:38 +00003866 }
3867
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003868 // The landingpad is now unreachable. Zap it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003869 if (LoopHeaders)
3870 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Chijun Simae8263f32018-08-15 13:56:21 +00003871 BB->eraseFromParent();
Chen Li7009cd32015-10-23 21:13:01 +00003872 return true;
Duncan Sands29192d02011-09-05 12:57:57 +00003873}
3874
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00003875static bool removeEmptyCleanup(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003876 // If this is a trivial cleanup pad that executes no instructions, it can be
3877 // eliminated. If the cleanup pad continues to the caller, any predecessor
3878 // that is an EH pad will be updated to continue to the caller and any
3879 // predecessor that terminates with an invoke instruction will have its invoke
3880 // instruction converted to a call instruction. If the cleanup pad being
3881 // simplified does not continue to the caller, each predecessor will be
3882 // updated to continue to the unwind destination of the cleanup pad being
3883 // simplified.
3884 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003885 CleanupPadInst *CPInst = RI->getCleanupPad();
3886 if (CPInst->getParent() != BB)
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003887 // This isn't an empty cleanup.
3888 return false;
3889
David Majnemer2482e1c2016-06-04 23:50:03 +00003890 // We cannot kill the pad if it has multiple uses. This typically arises
3891 // from unreachable basic blocks.
3892 if (!CPInst->hasOneUse())
3893 return false;
3894
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003895 // Check that there are no other instructions except for benign intrinsics.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003896 BasicBlock::iterator I = CPInst->getIterator(), E = RI->getIterator();
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003897 while (++I != E) {
3898 auto *II = dyn_cast<IntrinsicInst>(I);
3899 if (!II)
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003900 return false;
3901
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003902 Intrinsic::ID IntrinsicID = II->getIntrinsicID();
3903 switch (IntrinsicID) {
3904 case Intrinsic::dbg_declare:
3905 case Intrinsic::dbg_value:
Shiva Chen2c864552018-05-09 02:40:45 +00003906 case Intrinsic::dbg_label:
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00003907 case Intrinsic::lifetime_end:
3908 break;
3909 default:
3910 return false;
3911 }
3912 }
3913
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003914 // If the cleanup return we are simplifying unwinds to the caller, this will
3915 // set UnwindDest to nullptr.
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003916 BasicBlock *UnwindDest = RI->getUnwindDest();
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003917 Instruction *DestEHPad = UnwindDest ? UnwindDest->getFirstNonPHI() : nullptr;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003918
3919 // We're about to remove BB from the control flow. Before we do, sink any
3920 // PHINodes into the unwind destination. Doing this before changing the
3921 // control flow avoids some potentially slow checks, since we can currently
3922 // be certain that UnwindDest and BB have no common predecessors (since they
3923 // are both EH pads).
3924 if (UnwindDest) {
3925 // First, go through the PHI nodes in UnwindDest and update any nodes that
3926 // reference the block we are removing
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003927 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = UnwindDest->begin(),
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003928 IE = DestEHPad->getIterator();
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003929 I != IE; ++I) {
3930 PHINode *DestPN = cast<PHINode>(I);
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003931
Andrew Kaylor2a9a6d82015-09-05 01:00:51 +00003932 int Idx = DestPN->getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003933 // Since BB unwinds to UnwindDest, it has to be in the PHI node.
Craig Topper02a55d72015-09-05 04:49:44 +00003934 assert(Idx != -1);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003935 // This PHI node has an incoming value that corresponds to a control
3936 // path through the cleanup pad we are removing. If the incoming
3937 // value is in the cleanup pad, it must be a PHINode (because we
3938 // verified above that the block is otherwise empty). Otherwise, the
3939 // value is either a constant or a value that dominates the cleanup
3940 // pad being removed.
3941 //
3942 // Because BB and UnwindDest are both EH pads, all of their
3943 // predecessors must unwind to these blocks, and since no instruction
3944 // can have multiple unwind destinations, there will be no overlap in
3945 // incoming blocks between SrcPN and DestPN.
3946 Value *SrcVal = DestPN->getIncomingValue(Idx);
3947 PHINode *SrcPN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(SrcVal);
3948
3949 // Remove the entry for the block we are deleting.
3950 DestPN->removeIncomingValue(Idx, false);
3951
3952 if (SrcPN && SrcPN->getParent() == BB) {
3953 // If the incoming value was a PHI node in the cleanup pad we are
3954 // removing, we need to merge that PHI node's incoming values into
3955 // DestPN.
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00003956 for (unsigned SrcIdx = 0, SrcE = SrcPN->getNumIncomingValues();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00003957 SrcIdx != SrcE; ++SrcIdx) {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003958 DestPN->addIncoming(SrcPN->getIncomingValue(SrcIdx),
3959 SrcPN->getIncomingBlock(SrcIdx));
3960 }
3961 } else {
3962 // Otherwise, the incoming value came from above BB and
3963 // so we can just reuse it. We must associate all of BB's
3964 // predecessors with this value.
3965 for (auto *pred : predecessors(BB)) {
3966 DestPN->addIncoming(SrcVal, pred);
3967 }
3968 }
3969 }
3970
3971 // Sink any remaining PHI nodes directly into UnwindDest.
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00003972 Instruction *InsertPt = DestEHPad;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00003973 for (BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->begin(),
3974 IE = BB->getFirstNonPHI()->getIterator();
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003975 I != IE;) {
3976 // The iterator must be incremented here because the instructions are
3977 // being moved to another block.
3978 PHINode *PN = cast<PHINode>(I++);
3979 if (PN->use_empty())
3980 // If the PHI node has no uses, just leave it. It will be erased
3981 // when we erase BB below.
3982 continue;
3983
3984 // Otherwise, sink this PHI node into UnwindDest.
3985 // Any predecessors to UnwindDest which are not already represented
3986 // must be back edges which inherit the value from the path through
3987 // BB. In this case, the PHI value must reference itself.
3988 for (auto *pred : predecessors(UnwindDest))
3989 if (pred != BB)
3990 PN->addIncoming(PN, pred);
3991 PN->moveBefore(InsertPt);
3992 }
3993 }
3994
3995 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), PE = pred_end(BB); PI != PE;) {
3996 // The iterator must be updated here because we are removing this pred.
3997 BasicBlock *PredBB = *PI++;
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00003998 if (UnwindDest == nullptr) {
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00003999 removeUnwindEdge(PredBB);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00004000 } else {
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00004001 TerminatorInst *TI = PredBB->getTerminator();
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00004002 TI->replaceUsesOfWith(BB, UnwindDest);
Andrew Kaylor50e4e862015-09-04 23:39:40 +00004003 }
4004 }
4005
4006 // The cleanup pad is now unreachable. Zap it.
4007 BB->eraseFromParent();
4008 return true;
4009}
4010
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00004011// Try to merge two cleanuppads together.
4012static bool mergeCleanupPad(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
4013 // Skip any cleanuprets which unwind to caller, there is nothing to merge
4014 // with.
4015 BasicBlock *UnwindDest = RI->getUnwindDest();
4016 if (!UnwindDest)
4017 return false;
4018
4019 // This cleanupret isn't the only predecessor of this cleanuppad, it wouldn't
4020 // be safe to merge without code duplication.
4021 if (UnwindDest->getSinglePredecessor() != RI->getParent())
4022 return false;
4023
4024 // Verify that our cleanuppad's unwind destination is another cleanuppad.
4025 auto *SuccessorCleanupPad = dyn_cast<CleanupPadInst>(&UnwindDest->front());
4026 if (!SuccessorCleanupPad)
4027 return false;
4028
4029 CleanupPadInst *PredecessorCleanupPad = RI->getCleanupPad();
4030 // Replace any uses of the successor cleanupad with the predecessor pad
4031 // The only cleanuppad uses should be this cleanupret, it's cleanupret and
4032 // funclet bundle operands.
4033 SuccessorCleanupPad->replaceAllUsesWith(PredecessorCleanupPad);
4034 // Remove the old cleanuppad.
4035 SuccessorCleanupPad->eraseFromParent();
4036 // Now, we simply replace the cleanupret with a branch to the unwind
4037 // destination.
4038 BranchInst::Create(UnwindDest, RI->getParent());
4039 RI->eraseFromParent();
4040
4041 return true;
4042}
4043
4044bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCleanupReturn(CleanupReturnInst *RI) {
David Majnemeree0cbbb2016-02-24 17:30:48 +00004045 // It is possible to transiantly have an undef cleanuppad operand because we
4046 // have deleted some, but not all, dead blocks.
4047 // Eventually, this block will be deleted.
4048 if (isa<UndefValue>(RI->getOperand(0)))
4049 return false;
4050
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00004051 if (mergeCleanupPad(RI))
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00004052 return true;
4053
David Majnemer9f92f4c2016-05-21 05:12:32 +00004054 if (removeEmptyCleanup(RI))
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00004055 return true;
4056
4057 return false;
4058}
4059
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00004060bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyReturn(ReturnInst *RI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004061 BasicBlock *BB = RI->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004062 if (!BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->isTerminator())
4063 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004064
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004065 // Find predecessors that end with branches.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004066 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> UncondBranchPreds;
4067 SmallVector<BranchInst *, 8> CondBranchPreds;
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00004068 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI) {
4069 BasicBlock *P = *PI;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004070 TerminatorInst *PTI = P->getTerminator();
4071 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PTI)) {
4072 if (BI->isUnconditional())
4073 UncondBranchPreds.push_back(P);
4074 else
4075 CondBranchPreds.push_back(BI);
4076 }
4077 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004078
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004079 // If we found some, do the transformation!
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00004080 if (!UncondBranchPreds.empty() && DupRet) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004081 while (!UncondBranchPreds.empty()) {
4082 BasicBlock *Pred = UncondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00004083 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "FOLDING: " << *BB
4084 << "INTO UNCOND BRANCH PRED: " << *Pred);
Evan Chengd983eba2011-01-29 04:46:23 +00004085 (void)FoldReturnIntoUncondBranch(RI, BB, Pred);
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004086 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004087
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004088 // If we eliminated all predecessors of the block, delete the block now.
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00004089 if (pred_empty(BB)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004090 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004091 if (LoopHeaders)
4092 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Chijun Simae8263f32018-08-15 13:56:21 +00004093 BB->eraseFromParent();
Hyojin Sung4673f102016-03-29 04:08:57 +00004094 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004095
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004096 return true;
4097 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004098
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004099 // Check out all of the conditional branches going to this return
4100 // instruction. If any of them just select between returns, change the
4101 // branch itself into a select/return pair.
4102 while (!CondBranchPreds.empty()) {
4103 BranchInst *BI = CondBranchPreds.pop_back_val();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004104
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004105 // Check to see if the non-BB successor is also a return block.
4106 if (isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator()) &&
4107 isa<ReturnInst>(BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator()) &&
Devang Pateldd14e0f2011-05-18 21:33:11 +00004108 SimplifyCondBranchToTwoReturns(BI, Builder))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004109 return true;
4110 }
4111 return false;
4112}
4113
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004114bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUnreachable(UnreachableInst *UI) {
4115 BasicBlock *BB = UI->getParent();
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004116
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004117 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004118
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004119 // If there are any instructions immediately before the unreachable that can
4120 // be removed, do so.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004121 while (UI->getIterator() != BB->begin()) {
4122 BasicBlock::iterator BBI = UI->getIterator();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004123 --BBI;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004124 // Do not delete instructions that can have side effects which might cause
4125 // the unreachable to not be reachable; specifically, calls and volatile
4126 // operations may have this effect.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004127 if (isa<CallInst>(BBI) && !isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(BBI))
4128 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004129
4130 if (BBI->mayHaveSideEffects()) {
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004131 if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004132 if (SI->isVolatile())
4133 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004134 } else if (auto *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004135 if (LI->isVolatile())
4136 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004137 } else if (auto *RMWI = dyn_cast<AtomicRMWInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004138 if (RMWI->isVolatile())
4139 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004140 } else if (auto *CXI = dyn_cast<AtomicCmpXchgInst>(BBI)) {
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004141 if (CXI->isVolatile())
4142 break;
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004143 } else if (isa<CatchPadInst>(BBI)) {
4144 // A catchpad may invoke exception object constructors and such, which
4145 // in some languages can be arbitrary code, so be conservative by
4146 // default.
4147 // For CoreCLR, it just involves a type test, so can be removed.
4148 if (classifyEHPersonality(BB->getParent()->getPersonalityFn()) !=
4149 EHPersonality::CoreCLR)
4150 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004151 } else if (!isa<FenceInst>(BBI) && !isa<VAArgInst>(BBI) &&
4152 !isa<LandingPadInst>(BBI)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004153 break;
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004154 }
Bill Wendling55d875f2011-08-16 20:41:17 +00004155 // Note that deleting LandingPad's here is in fact okay, although it
4156 // involves a bit of subtle reasoning. If this inst is a LandingPad,
4157 // all the predecessors of this block will be the unwind edges of Invokes,
4158 // and we can therefore guarantee this block will be erased.
Eli Friedman0ffdf2e2011-08-15 23:59:28 +00004159 }
4160
Eli Friedmanaac35b32011-03-09 00:48:33 +00004161 // Delete this instruction (any uses are guaranteed to be dead)
4162 if (!BBI->use_empty())
4163 BBI->replaceAllUsesWith(UndefValue::get(BBI->getType()));
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00004164 BBI->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004165 Changed = true;
4166 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004167
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004168 // If the unreachable instruction is the first in the block, take a gander
4169 // at all of the predecessors of this instruction, and simplify them.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004170 if (&BB->front() != UI)
4171 return Changed;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004172
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004173 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> Preds(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004174 for (unsigned i = 0, e = Preds.size(); i != e; ++i) {
4175 TerminatorInst *TI = Preds[i]->getTerminator();
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00004176 IRBuilder<> Builder(TI);
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004177 if (auto *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(TI)) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004178 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
4179 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
4180 new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
4181 TI->eraseFromParent();
4182 Changed = true;
4183 }
4184 } else {
4185 if (BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00004186 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(1));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004187 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
4188 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1) == BB) {
Devang Patel31458a02011-05-19 00:09:21 +00004189 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0));
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004190 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(BI);
4191 Changed = true;
4192 }
4193 }
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004194 } else if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(TI)) {
Chandler Carruth0d256c02017-03-26 02:49:23 +00004195 for (auto i = SI->case_begin(), e = SI->case_end(); i != e;) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004196 if (i->getCaseSuccessor() != BB) {
Chandler Carruth0d256c02017-03-26 02:49:23 +00004197 ++i;
4198 continue;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004199 }
Chandler Carruth0d256c02017-03-26 02:49:23 +00004200 BB->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
4201 i = SI->removeCase(i);
4202 e = SI->case_end();
4203 Changed = true;
4204 }
Joseph Tremoulet0d808882016-01-05 02:37:41 +00004205 } else if (auto *II = dyn_cast<InvokeInst>(TI)) {
4206 if (II->getUnwindDest() == BB) {
4207 removeUnwindEdge(TI->getParent());
4208 Changed = true;
4209 }
4210 } else if (auto *CSI = dyn_cast<CatchSwitchInst>(TI)) {
4211 if (CSI->getUnwindDest() == BB) {
4212 removeUnwindEdge(TI->getParent());
4213 Changed = true;
4214 continue;
4215 }
4216
4217 for (CatchSwitchInst::handler_iterator I = CSI->handler_begin(),
4218 E = CSI->handler_end();
4219 I != E; ++I) {
4220 if (*I == BB) {
4221 CSI->removeHandler(I);
4222 --I;
4223 --E;
4224 Changed = true;
4225 }
4226 }
4227 if (CSI->getNumHandlers() == 0) {
4228 BasicBlock *CatchSwitchBB = CSI->getParent();
4229 if (CSI->hasUnwindDest()) {
4230 // Redirect preds to the unwind dest
4231 CatchSwitchBB->replaceAllUsesWith(CSI->getUnwindDest());
4232 } else {
4233 // Rewrite all preds to unwind to caller (or from invoke to call).
4234 SmallVector<BasicBlock *, 8> EHPreds(predecessors(CatchSwitchBB));
4235 for (BasicBlock *EHPred : EHPreds)
4236 removeUnwindEdge(EHPred);
4237 }
4238 // The catchswitch is no longer reachable.
4239 new UnreachableInst(CSI->getContext(), CSI);
4240 CSI->eraseFromParent();
4241 Changed = true;
4242 }
David Majnemer8a1c45d2015-12-12 05:38:55 +00004243 } else if (isa<CleanupReturnInst>(TI)) {
Joseph Tremoulet09af67a2015-09-27 01:47:46 +00004244 new UnreachableInst(TI->getContext(), TI);
4245 TI->eraseFromParent();
4246 Changed = true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004247 }
4248 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00004249
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004250 // If this block is now dead, remove it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004251 if (pred_empty(BB) && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004252 // We know there are no successors, so just nuke the block.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004253 if (LoopHeaders)
4254 LoopHeaders->erase(BB);
Chijun Simae8263f32018-08-15 13:56:21 +00004255 BB->eraseFromParent();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004256 return true;
4257 }
4258
4259 return Changed;
4260}
4261
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004262static bool CasesAreContiguous(SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> &Cases) {
4263 assert(Cases.size() >= 1);
4264
4265 array_pod_sort(Cases.begin(), Cases.end(), ConstantIntSortPredicate);
4266 for (size_t I = 1, E = Cases.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4267 if (Cases[I - 1]->getValue() != Cases[I]->getValue() + 1)
4268 return false;
4269 }
4270 return true;
4271}
4272
4273/// Turn a switch with two reachable destinations into an integer range
4274/// comparison and branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00004275static bool TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00004276 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004277
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004278 bool HasDefault =
4279 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00004280
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004281 // Partition the cases into two sets with different destinations.
4282 BasicBlock *DestA = HasDefault ? SI->getDefaultDest() : nullptr;
4283 BasicBlock *DestB = nullptr;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004284 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 16> CasesA;
4285 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 16> CasesB;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004286
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004287 for (auto Case : SI->cases()) {
4288 BasicBlock *Dest = Case.getCaseSuccessor();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004289 if (!DestA)
4290 DestA = Dest;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004291 if (Dest == DestA) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004292 CasesA.push_back(Case.getCaseValue());
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004293 continue;
4294 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004295 if (!DestB)
4296 DestB = Dest;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004297 if (Dest == DestB) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004298 CasesB.push_back(Case.getCaseValue());
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004299 continue;
4300 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004301 return false; // More than two destinations.
Benjamin Kramer62aa46b2011-02-03 22:51:41 +00004302 }
4303
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004304 assert(DestA && DestB &&
4305 "Single-destination switch should have been folded.");
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004306 assert(DestA != DestB);
4307 assert(DestB != SI->getDefaultDest());
4308 assert(!CasesB.empty() && "There must be non-default cases.");
4309 assert(!CasesA.empty() || HasDefault);
4310
4311 // Figure out if one of the sets of cases form a contiguous range.
4312 SmallVectorImpl<ConstantInt *> *ContiguousCases = nullptr;
4313 BasicBlock *ContiguousDest = nullptr;
4314 BasicBlock *OtherDest = nullptr;
4315 if (!CasesA.empty() && CasesAreContiguous(CasesA)) {
4316 ContiguousCases = &CasesA;
4317 ContiguousDest = DestA;
4318 OtherDest = DestB;
4319 } else if (CasesAreContiguous(CasesB)) {
4320 ContiguousCases = &CasesB;
4321 ContiguousDest = DestB;
4322 OtherDest = DestA;
4323 } else
4324 return false;
4325
4326 // Start building the compare and branch.
4327
4328 Constant *Offset = ConstantExpr::getNeg(ContiguousCases->back());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004329 Constant *NumCases =
4330 ConstantInt::get(Offset->getType(), ContiguousCases->size());
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004331
Benjamin Kramer8d6a8c12011-02-07 22:37:28 +00004332 Value *Sub = SI->getCondition();
4333 if (!Offset->isNullValue())
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004334 Sub = Builder.CreateAdd(Sub, Offset, Sub->getName() + ".off");
4335
Hans Wennborgc9e1d992013-04-16 08:35:36 +00004336 Value *Cmp;
4337 // If NumCases overflowed, then all possible values jump to the successor.
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004338 if (NumCases->isNullValue() && !ContiguousCases->empty())
Hans Wennborgc9e1d992013-04-16 08:35:36 +00004339 Cmp = ConstantInt::getTrue(SI->getContext());
4340 else
4341 Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(Sub, NumCases, "switch");
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004342 BranchInst *NewBI = Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, ContiguousDest, OtherDest);
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004343
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004344 // Update weight for the newly-created conditional branch.
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004345 if (HasBranchWeights(SI)) {
4346 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004347 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
4348 if (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases()) {
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004349 uint64_t TrueWeight = 0;
4350 uint64_t FalseWeight = 0;
4351 for (size_t I = 0, E = Weights.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4352 if (SI->getSuccessor(I) == ContiguousDest)
4353 TrueWeight += Weights[I];
4354 else
4355 FalseWeight += Weights[I];
4356 }
4357 while (TrueWeight > UINT32_MAX || FalseWeight > UINT32_MAX) {
4358 TrueWeight /= 2;
4359 FalseWeight /= 2;
4360 }
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00004361 setBranchWeights(NewBI, TrueWeight, FalseWeight);
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004362 }
4363 }
4364
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004365 // Prune obsolete incoming values off the successors' PHI nodes.
4366 for (auto BBI = ContiguousDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
4367 unsigned PreviousEdges = ContiguousCases->size();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004368 if (ContiguousDest == SI->getDefaultDest())
4369 ++PreviousEdges;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004370 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004371 cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
4372 }
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004373 for (auto BBI = OtherDest->begin(); isa<PHINode>(BBI); ++BBI) {
4374 unsigned PreviousEdges = SI->getNumCases() - ContiguousCases->size();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004375 if (OtherDest == SI->getDefaultDest())
4376 ++PreviousEdges;
Hans Wennborg68000082015-01-26 19:52:32 +00004377 for (unsigned I = 0, E = PreviousEdges - 1; I != E; ++I)
4378 cast<PHINode>(BBI)->removeIncomingValue(SI->getParent());
4379 }
4380
4381 // Drop the switch.
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00004382 SI->eraseFromParent();
4383
4384 return true;
4385}
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00004386
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004387/// Compute masked bits for the condition of a switch
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004388/// and use it to remove dead cases.
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00004389static bool eliminateDeadSwitchCases(SwitchInst *SI, AssumptionCache *AC,
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00004390 const DataLayout &DL) {
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004391 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
Matt Arsenault8227b9f2013-09-06 00:37:24 +00004392 unsigned Bits = Cond->getType()->getIntegerBitWidth();
Craig Topper8205a1a2017-05-24 16:53:07 +00004393 KnownBits Known = computeKnownBits(Cond, DL, 0, AC, SI);
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004394
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004395 // We can also eliminate cases by determining that their values are outside of
4396 // the limited range of the condition based on how many significant (non-sign)
4397 // bits are in the condition value.
Daniel Jasperaec2fa32016-12-19 08:22:17 +00004398 unsigned ExtraSignBits = ComputeNumSignBits(Cond, DL, 0, AC, SI) - 1;
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004399 unsigned MaxSignificantBitsInCond = Bits - ExtraSignBits;
4400
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004401 // Gather dead cases.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004402 SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 8> DeadCases;
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004403 for (auto &Case : SI->cases()) {
Craig Toppere777fed2017-05-22 00:49:35 +00004404 const APInt &CaseVal = Case.getCaseValue()->getValue();
Craig Topperb45eabc2017-04-26 16:39:58 +00004405 if (Known.Zero.intersects(CaseVal) || !Known.One.isSubsetOf(CaseVal) ||
Sanjay Patel75892a12016-05-20 14:53:09 +00004406 (CaseVal.getMinSignedBits() > MaxSignificantBitsInCond)) {
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004407 DeadCases.push_back(Case.getCaseValue());
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00004408 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch case " << CaseVal
4409 << " is dead.\n");
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004410 }
4411 }
4412
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004413 // If we can prove that the cases must cover all possible values, the
4414 // default destination becomes dead and we can remove it. If we know some
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004415 // of the bits in the value, we can use that to more precisely compute the
4416 // number of possible unique case values.
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00004417 bool HasDefault =
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004418 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
4419 const unsigned NumUnknownBits =
Craig Topperb45eabc2017-04-26 16:39:58 +00004420 Bits - (Known.Zero | Known.One).countPopulation();
Filipe Cabecinhas48b090a2015-09-10 22:34:39 +00004421 assert(NumUnknownBits <= Bits);
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004422 if (HasDefault && DeadCases.empty() &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004423 NumUnknownBits < 64 /* avoid overflow */ &&
Philip Reames05370132015-09-10 17:44:47 +00004424 SI->getNumCases() == (1ULL << NumUnknownBits)) {
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00004425 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "SimplifyCFG: switch default is dead.\n");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004426 BasicBlock *NewDefault =
4427 SplitBlockPredecessors(SI->getDefaultDest(), SI->getParent(), "");
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith5b4c8372015-10-13 02:39:05 +00004428 SI->setDefaultDest(&*NewDefault);
4429 SplitBlock(&*NewDefault, &NewDefault->front());
Philip Reames98a2dab2015-08-26 23:56:46 +00004430 auto *OldTI = NewDefault->getTerminator();
4431 new UnreachableInst(SI->getContext(), OldTI);
4432 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(OldTI);
4433 return true;
4434 }
4435
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004436 SmallVector<uint64_t, 8> Weights;
4437 bool HasWeight = HasBranchWeights(SI);
4438 if (HasWeight) {
4439 GetBranchWeights(SI, Weights);
4440 HasWeight = (Weights.size() == 1 + SI->getNumCases());
4441 }
4442
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004443 // Remove dead cases from the switch.
Sanjay Patel5d5134f2016-05-13 20:24:53 +00004444 for (ConstantInt *DeadCase : DeadCases) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004445 SwitchInst::CaseIt CaseI = SI->findCaseValue(DeadCase);
4446 assert(CaseI != SI->case_default() &&
Stepan Dyatkovskiy513aaa52012-02-01 07:49:51 +00004447 "Case was not found. Probably mistake in DeadCases forming.");
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004448 if (HasWeight) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004449 std::swap(Weights[CaseI->getCaseIndex() + 1], Weights.back());
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004450 Weights.pop_back();
4451 }
4452
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004453 // Prune unused values from PHI nodes.
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004454 CaseI->getCaseSuccessor()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
4455 SI->removeCase(CaseI);
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004456 }
Justin Bogner0ba3f212013-12-20 08:21:30 +00004457 if (HasWeight && Weights.size() >= 2) {
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004458 SmallVector<uint32_t, 8> MDWeights(Weights.begin(), Weights.end());
Easwaran Raman0a0913d2017-11-09 22:52:20 +00004459 setBranchWeights(SI, MDWeights);
Manman Ren56575552012-09-18 00:47:33 +00004460 }
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00004461
4462 return !DeadCases.empty();
4463}
4464
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004465/// If BB would be eligible for simplification by
4466/// TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock (i.e. it is empty and terminated
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004467/// by an unconditional branch), look at the phi node for BB in the successor
4468/// block and see if the incoming value is equal to CaseValue. If so, return
4469/// the phi node, and set PhiIndex to BB's index in the phi node.
4470static PHINode *FindPHIForConditionForwarding(ConstantInt *CaseValue,
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004471 BasicBlock *BB, int *PhiIndex) {
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004472 if (BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg() != BB->getTerminator())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004473 return nullptr; // BB must be empty to be a candidate for simplification.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004474 if (!BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004475 return nullptr; // BB must be dominated by the switch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004476
4477 BranchInst *Branch = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator());
4478 if (!Branch || !Branch->isUnconditional())
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004479 return nullptr; // Terminator must be unconditional branch.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004480
4481 BasicBlock *Succ = Branch->getSuccessor(0);
4482
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00004483 for (PHINode &PHI : Succ->phis()) {
4484 int Idx = PHI.getBasicBlockIndex(BB);
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004485 assert(Idx >= 0 && "PHI has no entry for predecessor?");
4486
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00004487 Value *InValue = PHI.getIncomingValue(Idx);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004488 if (InValue != CaseValue)
4489 continue;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004490
4491 *PhiIndex = Idx;
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00004492 return &PHI;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004493 }
4494
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004495 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004496}
4497
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004498/// Try to forward the condition of a switch instruction to a phi node
4499/// dominated by the switch, if that would mean that some of the destination
Sanjay Patel30f30d32017-10-15 14:43:39 +00004500/// blocks of the switch can be folded away. Return true if a change is made.
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004501static bool ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SwitchInst *SI) {
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00004502 using ForwardingNodesMap = DenseMap<PHINode *, SmallVector<int, 4>>;
4503
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004504 ForwardingNodesMap ForwardingNodes;
Sanjay Patel24226502017-10-22 16:51:03 +00004505 BasicBlock *SwitchBlock = SI->getParent();
4506 bool Changed = false;
Sanjay Patel30f30d32017-10-15 14:43:39 +00004507 for (auto &Case : SI->cases()) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00004508 ConstantInt *CaseValue = Case.getCaseValue();
4509 BasicBlock *CaseDest = Case.getCaseSuccessor();
Sanjay Patel24226502017-10-22 16:51:03 +00004510
4511 // Replace phi operands in successor blocks that are using the constant case
4512 // value rather than the switch condition variable:
4513 // switchbb:
4514 // switch i32 %x, label %default [
4515 // i32 17, label %succ
4516 // ...
4517 // succ:
4518 // %r = phi i32 ... [ 17, %switchbb ] ...
4519 // -->
4520 // %r = phi i32 ... [ %x, %switchbb ] ...
4521
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00004522 for (PHINode &Phi : CaseDest->phis()) {
Sanjay Patel24226502017-10-22 16:51:03 +00004523 // This only works if there is exactly 1 incoming edge from the switch to
4524 // a phi. If there is >1, that means multiple cases of the switch map to 1
4525 // value in the phi, and that phi value is not the switch condition. Thus,
4526 // this transform would not make sense (the phi would be invalid because
4527 // a phi can't have different incoming values from the same block).
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00004528 int SwitchBBIdx = Phi.getBasicBlockIndex(SwitchBlock);
4529 if (Phi.getIncomingValue(SwitchBBIdx) == CaseValue &&
4530 count(Phi.blocks(), SwitchBlock) == 1) {
4531 Phi.setIncomingValue(SwitchBBIdx, SI->getCondition());
Sanjay Patel24226502017-10-22 16:51:03 +00004532 Changed = true;
4533 }
4534 }
4535
4536 // Collect phi nodes that are indirectly using this switch's case constants.
Sanjay Patel30f30d32017-10-15 14:43:39 +00004537 int PhiIdx;
4538 if (auto *Phi = FindPHIForConditionForwarding(CaseValue, CaseDest, &PhiIdx))
4539 ForwardingNodes[Phi].push_back(PhiIdx);
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004540 }
4541
Sanjay Patel30f30d32017-10-15 14:43:39 +00004542 for (auto &ForwardingNode : ForwardingNodes) {
4543 PHINode *Phi = ForwardingNode.first;
4544 SmallVectorImpl<int> &Indexes = ForwardingNode.second;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004545 if (Indexes.size() < 2)
4546 continue;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004547
Sanjay Patel30f30d32017-10-15 14:43:39 +00004548 for (int Index : Indexes)
4549 Phi->setIncomingValue(Index, SI->getCondition());
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00004550 Changed = true;
4551 }
4552
4553 return Changed;
4554}
4555
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004556/// Return true if the backend will be able to handle
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004557/// initializing an array of constants like C.
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004558static bool ValidLookupTableConstant(Constant *C, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Hans Wennborg4dc89512014-06-20 00:38:12 +00004559 if (C->isThreadDependent())
4560 return false;
4561 if (C->isDLLImportDependent())
4562 return false;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004563
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004564 if (!isa<ConstantFP>(C) && !isa<ConstantInt>(C) &&
4565 !isa<ConstantPointerNull>(C) && !isa<GlobalValue>(C) &&
4566 !isa<UndefValue>(C) && !isa<ConstantExpr>(C))
4567 return false;
Hans Wennborgb03ebfb2014-06-26 00:30:52 +00004568
Oliver Stannardfe4432b2016-10-17 12:00:24 +00004569 if (ConstantExpr *CE = dyn_cast<ConstantExpr>(C)) {
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004570 if (!CE->isGEPWithNoNotionalOverIndexing())
4571 return false;
Oliver Stannardfe4432b2016-10-17 12:00:24 +00004572 if (!ValidLookupTableConstant(CE->getOperand(0), TTI))
4573 return false;
4574 }
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004575
4576 if (!TTI.shouldBuildLookupTablesForConstant(C))
4577 return false;
4578
4579 return true;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004580}
4581
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004582/// If V is a Constant, return it. Otherwise, try to look up
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004583/// its constant value in ConstantPool, returning 0 if it's not there.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004584static Constant *
4585LookupConstant(Value *V,
4586 const SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> &ConstantPool) {
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004587 if (Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V))
4588 return C;
4589 return ConstantPool.lookup(V);
4590}
4591
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004592/// Try to fold instruction I into a constant. This works for
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004593/// simple instructions such as binary operations where both operands are
4594/// constant or can be replaced by constants from the ConstantPool. Returns the
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004595/// resulting constant on success, 0 otherwise.
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004596static Constant *
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004597ConstantFold(Instruction *I, const DataLayout &DL,
4598 const SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> &ConstantPool) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004599 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(I)) {
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004600 Constant *A = LookupConstant(Select->getCondition(), ConstantPool);
4601 if (!A)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004602 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg09acdb92012-10-31 15:14:39 +00004603 if (A->isAllOnesValue())
4604 return LookupConstant(Select->getTrueValue(), ConstantPool);
4605 if (A->isNullValue())
4606 return LookupConstant(Select->getFalseValue(), ConstantPool);
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004607 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004608 }
4609
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004610 SmallVector<Constant *, 4> COps;
4611 for (unsigned N = 0, E = I->getNumOperands(); N != E; ++N) {
4612 if (Constant *A = LookupConstant(I->getOperand(N), ConstantPool))
4613 COps.push_back(A);
4614 else
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004615 return nullptr;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004616 }
4617
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004618 if (CmpInst *Cmp = dyn_cast<CmpInst>(I)) {
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004619 return ConstantFoldCompareInstOperands(Cmp->getPredicate(), COps[0],
4620 COps[1], DL);
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004621 }
Benjamin Kramer7c302602013-11-12 12:24:36 +00004622
Manuel Jacobe9024592016-01-21 06:33:22 +00004623 return ConstantFoldInstOperands(I, COps, DL);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004624}
4625
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004626/// Try to determine the resulting constant values in phi nodes
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004627/// at the common destination basic block, *CommonDest, for one of the case
Hans Wennborg4fef2fe2012-10-31 15:31:09 +00004628/// destionations CaseDest corresponding to value CaseVal (0 for the default
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004629/// case), of a switch instruction SI.
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00004630static bool
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004631GetCaseResults(SwitchInst *SI, ConstantInt *CaseVal, BasicBlock *CaseDest,
Craig Topperb94011f2013-07-14 04:42:23 +00004632 BasicBlock **CommonDest,
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00004633 SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>> &Res,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004634 const DataLayout &DL, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004635 // The block from which we enter the common destination.
4636 BasicBlock *Pred = SI->getParent();
4637
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004638 // If CaseDest is empty except for some side-effect free instructions through
4639 // which we can constant-propagate the CaseVal, continue to its successor.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004640 SmallDenseMap<Value *, Constant *> ConstantPool;
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004641 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(SI->getCondition(), CaseVal));
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00004642 for (Instruction &I :CaseDest->instructionsWithoutDebug()) {
4643 if (TerminatorInst *T = dyn_cast<TerminatorInst>(&I)) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004644 // If the terminator is a simple branch, continue to the next block.
Chandler Carruth698fbe72018-08-26 08:56:42 +00004645 if (T->getNumSuccessors() != 1 || T->isExceptionalTerminator())
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004646 return false;
4647 Pred = CaseDest;
4648 CaseDest = T->getSuccessor(0);
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00004649 } else if (Constant *C = ConstantFold(&I, DL, ConstantPool)) {
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004650 // Instruction is side-effect free and constant.
Hans Wennborgdcc6e5b2015-01-09 22:13:31 +00004651
4652 // If the instruction has uses outside this block or a phi node slot for
4653 // the block, it is not safe to bypass the instruction since it would then
4654 // no longer dominate all its uses.
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00004655 for (auto &Use : I.uses()) {
Hans Wennborgdcc6e5b2015-01-09 22:13:31 +00004656 User *User = Use.getUser();
4657 if (Instruction *I = dyn_cast<Instruction>(User))
4658 if (I->getParent() == CaseDest)
4659 continue;
4660 if (PHINode *Phi = dyn_cast<PHINode>(User))
4661 if (Phi->getIncomingBlock(Use) == CaseDest)
4662 continue;
4663 return false;
4664 }
4665
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00004666 ConstantPool.insert(std::make_pair(&I, C));
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004667 } else {
4668 break;
4669 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004670 }
4671
4672 // If we did not have a CommonDest before, use the current one.
4673 if (!*CommonDest)
4674 *CommonDest = CaseDest;
4675 // If the destination isn't the common one, abort.
4676 if (CaseDest != *CommonDest)
4677 return false;
4678
4679 // Get the values for this case from phi nodes in the destination block.
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00004680 for (PHINode &PHI : (*CommonDest)->phis()) {
4681 int Idx = PHI.getBasicBlockIndex(Pred);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004682 if (Idx == -1)
4683 continue;
4684
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004685 Constant *ConstVal =
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00004686 LookupConstant(PHI.getIncomingValue(Idx), ConstantPool);
Hans Wennborg9e74dd92012-10-31 13:42:45 +00004687 if (!ConstVal)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004688 return false;
4689
4690 // Be conservative about which kinds of constants we support.
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004691 if (!ValidLookupTableConstant(ConstVal, TTI))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004692 return false;
4693
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00004694 Res.push_back(std::make_pair(&PHI, ConstVal));
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004695 }
4696
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004697 return Res.size() > 0;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004698}
4699
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004700// Helper function used to add CaseVal to the list of cases that generate
Marcello Maggioni70834232018-01-11 02:01:16 +00004701// Result. Returns the updated number of cases that generate this result.
4702static uintptr_t MapCaseToResult(ConstantInt *CaseVal,
4703 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
4704 Constant *Result) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004705 for (auto &I : UniqueResults) {
4706 if (I.first == Result) {
4707 I.second.push_back(CaseVal);
Marcello Maggioni70834232018-01-11 02:01:16 +00004708 return I.second.size();
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004709 }
4710 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004711 UniqueResults.push_back(
4712 std::make_pair(Result, SmallVector<ConstantInt *, 4>(1, CaseVal)));
Marcello Maggioni70834232018-01-11 02:01:16 +00004713 return 1;
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004714}
4715
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004716// Helper function that initializes a map containing
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004717// results for the PHI node of the common destination block for a switch
4718// instruction. Returns false if multiple PHI nodes have been found or if
4719// there is not a common destination block for the switch.
Marcello Maggioni70834232018-01-11 02:01:16 +00004720static bool
4721InitializeUniqueCases(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *&PHI, BasicBlock *&CommonDest,
4722 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &UniqueResults,
4723 Constant *&DefaultResult, const DataLayout &DL,
4724 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
4725 uintptr_t MaxUniqueResults, uintptr_t MaxCasesPerResult) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004726 for (auto &I : SI->cases()) {
4727 ConstantInt *CaseVal = I.getCaseValue();
4728
4729 // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
4730 SwitchCaseResultsTy Results;
4731 if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, I.getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest, Results,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004732 DL, TTI))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004733 return false;
4734
Marcello Maggioniddccd502018-01-11 02:06:28 +00004735 // Only one value per case is permitted.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004736 if (Results.size() > 1)
4737 return false;
Marcello Maggioni70834232018-01-11 02:01:16 +00004738
4739 // Add the case->result mapping to UniqueResults.
4740 const uintptr_t NumCasesForResult =
4741 MapCaseToResult(CaseVal, UniqueResults, Results.begin()->second);
4742
4743 // Early out if there are too many cases for this result.
4744 if (NumCasesForResult > MaxCasesPerResult)
4745 return false;
4746
4747 // Early out if there are too many unique results.
4748 if (UniqueResults.size() > MaxUniqueResults)
4749 return false;
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004750
4751 // Check the PHI consistency.
4752 if (!PHI)
4753 PHI = Results[0].first;
4754 else if (PHI != Results[0].first)
4755 return false;
4756 }
4757 // Find the default result value.
4758 SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 1> DefaultResults;
4759 BasicBlock *DefaultDest = SI->getDefaultDest();
4760 GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(), &CommonDest, DefaultResults,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004761 DL, TTI);
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004762 // If the default value is not found abort unless the default destination
4763 // is unreachable.
4764 DefaultResult =
4765 DefaultResults.size() == 1 ? DefaultResults.begin()->second : nullptr;
4766 if ((!DefaultResult &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004767 !isa<UnreachableInst>(DefaultDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg())))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004768 return false;
4769
4770 return true;
4771}
4772
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004773// Helper function that checks if it is possible to transform a switch with only
4774// two cases (or two cases + default) that produces a result into a select.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004775// Example:
4776// switch (a) {
4777// case 10: %0 = icmp eq i32 %a, 10
4778// return 10; %1 = select i1 %0, i32 10, i32 4
4779// case 20: ----> %2 = icmp eq i32 %a, 20
4780// return 2; %3 = select i1 %2, i32 2, i32 %1
4781// default:
4782// return 4;
4783// }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004784static Value *ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(const SwitchCaseResultVectorTy &ResultVector,
4785 Constant *DefaultResult, Value *Condition,
4786 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004787 assert(ResultVector.size() == 2 &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004788 "We should have exactly two unique results at this point");
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004789 // If we are selecting between only two cases transform into a simple
4790 // select or a two-way select if default is possible.
4791 if (ResultVector[0].second.size() == 1 &&
4792 ResultVector[1].second.size() == 1) {
4793 ConstantInt *const FirstCase = ResultVector[0].second[0];
4794 ConstantInt *const SecondCase = ResultVector[1].second[0];
4795
4796 bool DefaultCanTrigger = DefaultResult;
4797 Value *SelectValue = ResultVector[1].first;
4798 if (DefaultCanTrigger) {
4799 Value *const ValueCompare =
4800 Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, SecondCase, "switch.selectcmp");
4801 SelectValue = Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[1].first,
4802 DefaultResult, "switch.select");
4803 }
4804 Value *const ValueCompare =
4805 Builder.CreateICmpEQ(Condition, FirstCase, "switch.selectcmp");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004806 return Builder.CreateSelect(ValueCompare, ResultVector[0].first,
4807 SelectValue, "switch.select");
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004808 }
4809
4810 return nullptr;
4811}
4812
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004813// Helper function to cleanup a switch instruction that has been converted into
4814// a select, fixing up PHI nodes and basic blocks.
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004815static void RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SwitchInst *SI, PHINode *PHI,
4816 Value *SelectValue,
4817 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
4818 BasicBlock *SelectBB = SI->getParent();
4819 while (PHI->getBasicBlockIndex(SelectBB) >= 0)
4820 PHI->removeIncomingValue(SelectBB);
4821 PHI->addIncoming(SelectValue, SelectBB);
4822
4823 Builder.CreateBr(PHI->getParent());
4824
4825 // Remove the switch.
4826 for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
4827 BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
4828
4829 if (Succ == PHI->getParent())
4830 continue;
4831 Succ->removePredecessor(SelectBB);
4832 }
4833 SI->eraseFromParent();
4834}
4835
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00004836/// If the switch is only used to initialize one or more
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004837/// phi nodes in a common successor block with only two different
4838/// constant values, replace the switch with select.
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00004839static bool switchToSelect(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
4840 const DataLayout &DL,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00004841 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004842 Value *const Cond = SI->getCondition();
4843 PHINode *PHI = nullptr;
4844 BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
4845 Constant *DefaultResult;
4846 SwitchCaseResultVectorTy UniqueResults;
4847 // Collect all the cases that will deliver the same value from the switch.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004848 if (!InitializeUniqueCases(SI, PHI, CommonDest, UniqueResults, DefaultResult,
Marcello Maggioni70834232018-01-11 02:01:16 +00004849 DL, TTI, 2, 1))
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004850 return false;
4851 // Selects choose between maximum two values.
4852 if (UniqueResults.size() != 2)
4853 return false;
4854 assert(PHI != nullptr && "PHI for value select not found");
4855
4856 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004857 Value *SelectValue =
4858 ConvertTwoCaseSwitch(UniqueResults, DefaultResult, Cond, Builder);
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00004859 if (SelectValue) {
4860 RemoveSwitchAfterSelectConversion(SI, PHI, SelectValue, Builder);
4861 return true;
4862 }
4863 // The switch couldn't be converted into a select.
4864 return false;
4865}
4866
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004867namespace {
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00004868
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004869/// This class represents a lookup table that can be used to replace a switch.
4870class SwitchLookupTable {
4871public:
4872 /// Create a lookup table to use as a switch replacement with the contents
4873 /// of Values, using DefaultValue to fill any holes in the table.
4874 SwitchLookupTable(
4875 Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
4876 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
Sumanth Gundapaneni5372f0a2017-06-30 20:00:01 +00004877 Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL, const StringRef &FuncName);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004878
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004879 /// Build instructions with Builder to retrieve the value at
4880 /// the position given by Index in the lookup table.
4881 Value *BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004882
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004883 /// Return true if a table with TableSize elements of
4884 /// type ElementType would fit in a target-legal register.
4885 static bool WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL, uint64_t TableSize,
4886 Type *ElementType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004887
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004888private:
4889 // Depending on the contents of the table, it can be represented in
4890 // different ways.
4891 enum {
4892 // For tables where each element contains the same value, we just have to
4893 // store that single value and return it for each lookup.
4894 SingleValueKind,
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004895
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004896 // For tables where there is a linear relationship between table index
4897 // and values. We calculate the result with a simple multiplication
4898 // and addition instead of a table lookup.
4899 LinearMapKind,
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004900
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004901 // For small tables with integer elements, we can pack them into a bitmap
4902 // that fits into a target-legal register. Values are retrieved by
4903 // shift and mask operations.
4904 BitMapKind,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004905
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004906 // The table is stored as an array of values. Values are retrieved by load
4907 // instructions from the table.
4908 ArrayKind
4909 } Kind;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004910
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004911 // For SingleValueKind, this is the single value.
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00004912 Constant *SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004913
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004914 // For BitMapKind, this is the bitmap.
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00004915 ConstantInt *BitMap = nullptr;
4916 IntegerType *BitMapElementTy = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00004917
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004918 // For LinearMapKind, these are the constants used to derive the value.
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00004919 ConstantInt *LinearOffset = nullptr;
4920 ConstantInt *LinearMultiplier = nullptr;
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004921
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004922 // For ArrayKind, this is the array.
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00004923 GlobalVariable *Array = nullptr;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004924};
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00004925
4926} // end anonymous namespace
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004927
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00004928SwitchLookupTable::SwitchLookupTable(
4929 Module &M, uint64_t TableSize, ConstantInt *Offset,
4930 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values,
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00004931 Constant *DefaultValue, const DataLayout &DL, const StringRef &FuncName) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00004932 assert(Values.size() && "Can't build lookup table without values!");
4933 assert(TableSize >= Values.size() && "Can't fit values in table!");
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004934
4935 // If all values in the table are equal, this is that value.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004936 SingleValue = Values.begin()->second;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004937
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004938 Type *ValueType = Values.begin()->second->getType();
4939
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004940 // Build up the table contents.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004941 SmallVector<Constant *, 64> TableContents(TableSize);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004942 for (size_t I = 0, E = Values.size(); I != E; ++I) {
4943 ConstantInt *CaseVal = Values[I].first;
4944 Constant *CaseRes = Values[I].second;
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004945 assert(CaseRes->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004946
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00004947 uint64_t Idx = (CaseVal->getValue() - Offset->getValue()).getLimitedValue();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004948 TableContents[Idx] = CaseRes;
4949
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004950 if (CaseRes != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004951 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004952 }
4953
4954 // Fill in any holes in the table with the default result.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004955 if (Values.size() < TableSize) {
Marcello Maggioni89c05ad2014-07-03 08:29:06 +00004956 assert(DefaultValue &&
4957 "Need a default value to fill the lookup table holes.");
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00004958 assert(DefaultValue->getType() == ValueType);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004959 for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
4960 if (!TableContents[I])
4961 TableContents[I] = DefaultValue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004962 }
4963
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004964 if (DefaultValue != SingleValue)
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00004965 SingleValue = nullptr;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004966 }
4967
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00004968 // If each element in the table contains the same value, we only need to store
4969 // that single value.
4970 if (SingleValue) {
4971 Kind = SingleValueKind;
4972 return;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00004973 }
4974
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004975 // Check if we can derive the value with a linear transformation from the
4976 // table index.
4977 if (isa<IntegerType>(ValueType)) {
4978 bool LinearMappingPossible = true;
4979 APInt PrevVal;
4980 APInt DistToPrev;
4981 assert(TableSize >= 2 && "Should be a SingleValue table.");
4982 // Check if there is the same distance between two consecutive values.
4983 for (uint64_t I = 0; I < TableSize; ++I) {
4984 ConstantInt *ConstVal = dyn_cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I]);
4985 if (!ConstVal) {
4986 // This is an undef. We could deal with it, but undefs in lookup tables
4987 // are very seldom. It's probably not worth the additional complexity.
4988 LinearMappingPossible = false;
4989 break;
4990 }
Craig Toppere777fed2017-05-22 00:49:35 +00004991 const APInt &Val = ConstVal->getValue();
Erik Eckstein105374f2014-11-17 09:13:57 +00004992 if (I != 0) {
4993 APInt Dist = Val - PrevVal;
4994 if (I == 1) {
4995 DistToPrev = Dist;
4996 } else if (Dist != DistToPrev) {
4997 LinearMappingPossible = false;
4998 break;
4999 }
5000 }
5001 PrevVal = Val;
5002 }
5003 if (LinearMappingPossible) {
5004 LinearOffset = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[0]);
5005 LinearMultiplier = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), DistToPrev);
5006 Kind = LinearMapKind;
5007 ++NumLinearMaps;
5008 return;
5009 }
5010 }
5011
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005012 // If the type is integer and the table fits in a register, build a bitmap.
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00005013 if (WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, ValueType)) {
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005014 IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(ValueType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005015 APInt TableInt(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth(), 0);
5016 for (uint64_t I = TableSize; I > 0; --I) {
5017 TableInt <<= IT->getBitWidth();
Benjamin Kramer9fc3dc72012-10-01 11:31:48 +00005018 // Insert values into the bitmap. Undef values are set to zero.
5019 if (!isa<UndefValue>(TableContents[I - 1])) {
5020 ConstantInt *Val = cast<ConstantInt>(TableContents[I - 1]);
5021 TableInt |= Val->getValue().zext(TableInt.getBitWidth());
5022 }
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005023 }
5024 BitMap = ConstantInt::get(M.getContext(), TableInt);
5025 BitMapElementTy = IT;
5026 Kind = BitMapKind;
5027 ++NumBitMaps;
5028 return;
5029 }
5030
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005031 // Store the table in an array.
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005032 ArrayType *ArrayTy = ArrayType::get(ValueType, TableSize);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005033 Constant *Initializer = ConstantArray::get(ArrayTy, TableContents);
5034
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005035 Array = new GlobalVariable(M, ArrayTy, /*constant=*/true,
5036 GlobalVariable::PrivateLinkage, Initializer,
Sumanth Gundapaneni5372f0a2017-06-30 20:00:01 +00005037 "switch.table." + FuncName);
Peter Collingbourne96efdd62016-06-14 21:01:22 +00005038 Array->setUnnamedAddr(GlobalValue::UnnamedAddr::Global);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005039 Kind = ArrayKind;
5040}
5041
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00005042Value *SwitchLookupTable::BuildLookup(Value *Index, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005043 switch (Kind) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005044 case SingleValueKind:
5045 return SingleValue;
5046 case LinearMapKind: {
5047 // Derive the result value from the input value.
5048 Value *Result = Builder.CreateIntCast(Index, LinearMultiplier->getType(),
5049 false, "switch.idx.cast");
5050 if (!LinearMultiplier->isOne())
5051 Result = Builder.CreateMul(Result, LinearMultiplier, "switch.idx.mult");
5052 if (!LinearOffset->isZero())
5053 Result = Builder.CreateAdd(Result, LinearOffset, "switch.offset");
5054 return Result;
5055 }
5056 case BitMapKind: {
5057 // Type of the bitmap (e.g. i59).
5058 IntegerType *MapTy = BitMap->getType();
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005059
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005060 // Cast Index to the same type as the bitmap.
5061 // Note: The Index is <= the number of elements in the table, so
5062 // truncating it to the width of the bitmask is safe.
5063 Value *ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(Index, MapTy, "switch.cast");
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005064
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005065 // Multiply the shift amount by the element width.
5066 ShiftAmt = Builder.CreateMul(
5067 ShiftAmt, ConstantInt::get(MapTy, BitMapElementTy->getBitWidth()),
5068 "switch.shiftamt");
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005069
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005070 // Shift down.
5071 Value *DownShifted =
5072 Builder.CreateLShr(BitMap, ShiftAmt, "switch.downshift");
5073 // Mask off.
5074 return Builder.CreateTrunc(DownShifted, BitMapElementTy, "switch.masked");
5075 }
5076 case ArrayKind: {
5077 // Make sure the table index will not overflow when treated as signed.
5078 IntegerType *IT = cast<IntegerType>(Index->getType());
5079 uint64_t TableSize =
5080 Array->getInitializer()->getType()->getArrayNumElements();
5081 if (TableSize > (1ULL << (IT->getBitWidth() - 1)))
5082 Index = Builder.CreateZExt(
5083 Index, IntegerType::get(IT->getContext(), IT->getBitWidth() + 1),
5084 "switch.tableidx.zext");
Manman Renedc60372014-07-23 23:13:23 +00005085
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005086 Value *GEPIndices[] = {Builder.getInt32(0), Index};
5087 Value *GEP = Builder.CreateInBoundsGEP(Array->getValueType(), Array,
5088 GEPIndices, "switch.gep");
5089 return Builder.CreateLoad(GEP, "switch.load");
5090 }
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005091 }
5092 llvm_unreachable("Unknown lookup table kind!");
5093}
5094
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005095bool SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(const DataLayout &DL,
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005096 uint64_t TableSize,
Craig Toppere3dcce92015-08-01 22:20:21 +00005097 Type *ElementType) {
5098 auto *IT = dyn_cast<IntegerType>(ElementType);
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005099 if (!IT)
5100 return false;
5101 // FIXME: If the type is wider than it needs to be, e.g. i8 but all values
5102 // are <= 15, we could try to narrow the type.
Benjamin Kramerc2081d12012-09-27 18:29:58 +00005103
5104 // Avoid overflow, fitsInLegalInteger uses unsigned int for the width.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005105 if (TableSize >= UINT_MAX / IT->getBitWidth())
Benjamin Kramerc2081d12012-09-27 18:29:58 +00005106 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005107 return DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize * IT->getBitWidth());
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005108}
5109
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00005110/// Determine whether a lookup table should be built for this switch, based on
5111/// the number of cases, size of the table, and the types of the results.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005112static bool
5113ShouldBuildLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, uint64_t TableSize,
5114 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI, const DataLayout &DL,
5115 const SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Type *> &ResultTypes) {
Hans Wennborgf2e2c102012-09-26 11:07:37 +00005116 if (SI->getNumCases() > TableSize || TableSize >= UINT64_MAX / 10)
5117 return false; // TableSize overflowed, or mul below might overflow.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005118
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00005119 bool AllTablesFitInRegister = true;
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00005120 bool HasIllegalType = false;
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005121 for (const auto &I : ResultTypes) {
5122 Type *Ty = I.second;
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00005123
5124 // Saturate this flag to true.
Chandler Carruth0b4ef9c2013-01-07 03:53:25 +00005125 HasIllegalType = HasIllegalType || !TTI.isTypeLegal(Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00005126
5127 // Saturate this flag to false.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005128 AllTablesFitInRegister =
5129 AllTablesFitInRegister &&
5130 SwitchLookupTable::WouldFitInRegister(DL, TableSize, Ty);
Chandler Carruthd9ef81e2012-11-30 09:34:29 +00005131
5132 // If both flags saturate, we're done. NOTE: This *only* works with
5133 // saturating flags, and all flags have to saturate first due to the
5134 // non-deterministic behavior of iterating over a dense map.
5135 if (HasIllegalType && !AllTablesFitInRegister)
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00005136 break;
Hans Wennborg39583b82012-09-26 09:44:49 +00005137 }
Evan Cheng65df8082012-11-30 02:02:42 +00005138
Chandler Carruth77d433d2012-11-30 09:26:25 +00005139 // If each table would fit in a register, we should build it anyway.
5140 if (AllTablesFitInRegister)
5141 return true;
5142
5143 // Don't build a table that doesn't fit in-register if it has illegal types.
5144 if (HasIllegalType)
5145 return false;
5146
5147 // The table density should be at least 40%. This is the same criterion as for
5148 // jump tables, see SelectionDAGBuilder::handleJTSwitchCase.
5149 // FIXME: Find the best cut-off.
5150 return SI->getNumCases() * 10 >= TableSize * 4;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005151}
5152
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005153/// Try to reuse the switch table index compare. Following pattern:
5154/// \code
5155/// if (idx < tablesize)
5156/// r = table[idx]; // table does not contain default_value
5157/// else
5158/// r = default_value;
5159/// if (r != default_value)
5160/// ...
5161/// \endcode
5162/// Is optimized to:
5163/// \code
5164/// cond = idx < tablesize;
5165/// if (cond)
5166/// r = table[idx];
5167/// else
5168/// r = default_value;
5169/// if (cond)
5170/// ...
5171/// \endcode
5172/// Jump threading will then eliminate the second if(cond).
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005173static void reuseTableCompare(
5174 User *PhiUser, BasicBlock *PhiBlock, BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch,
5175 Constant *DefaultValue,
5176 const SmallVectorImpl<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>> &Values) {
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005177 ICmpInst *CmpInst = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(PhiUser);
5178 if (!CmpInst)
5179 return;
5180
5181 // We require that the compare is in the same block as the phi so that jump
5182 // threading can do its work afterwards.
5183 if (CmpInst->getParent() != PhiBlock)
5184 return;
5185
5186 Constant *CmpOp1 = dyn_cast<Constant>(CmpInst->getOperand(1));
5187 if (!CmpOp1)
5188 return;
5189
5190 Value *RangeCmp = RangeCheckBranch->getCondition();
5191 Constant *TrueConst = ConstantInt::getTrue(RangeCmp->getType());
5192 Constant *FalseConst = ConstantInt::getFalse(RangeCmp->getType());
5193
5194 // Check if the compare with the default value is constant true or false.
5195 Constant *DefaultConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
5196 DefaultValue, CmpOp1, true);
5197 if (DefaultConst != TrueConst && DefaultConst != FalseConst)
5198 return;
5199
5200 // Check if the compare with the case values is distinct from the default
5201 // compare result.
5202 for (auto ValuePair : Values) {
5203 Constant *CaseConst = ConstantExpr::getICmp(CmpInst->getPredicate(),
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005204 ValuePair.second, CmpOp1, true);
Mikael Holmen0a3e9802017-12-05 14:14:00 +00005205 if (!CaseConst || CaseConst == DefaultConst || isa<UndefValue>(CaseConst))
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005206 return;
5207 assert((CaseConst == TrueConst || CaseConst == FalseConst) &&
5208 "Expect true or false as compare result.");
5209 }
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005210
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005211 // Check if the branch instruction dominates the phi node. It's a simple
5212 // dominance check, but sufficient for our needs.
5213 // Although this check is invariant in the calling loops, it's better to do it
5214 // at this late stage. Practically we do it at most once for a switch.
5215 BasicBlock *BranchBlock = RangeCheckBranch->getParent();
5216 for (auto PI = pred_begin(PhiBlock), E = pred_end(PhiBlock); PI != E; ++PI) {
5217 BasicBlock *Pred = *PI;
5218 if (Pred != BranchBlock && Pred->getUniquePredecessor() != BranchBlock)
5219 return;
5220 }
5221
5222 if (DefaultConst == FalseConst) {
5223 // The compare yields the same result. We can replace it.
5224 CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(RangeCmp);
5225 ++NumTableCmpReuses;
5226 } else {
5227 // The compare yields the same result, just inverted. We can replace it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005228 Value *InvertedTableCmp = BinaryOperator::CreateXor(
5229 RangeCmp, ConstantInt::get(RangeCmp->getType(), 1), "inverted.cmp",
5230 RangeCheckBranch);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005231 CmpInst->replaceAllUsesWith(InvertedTableCmp);
5232 ++NumTableCmpReuses;
5233 }
5234}
5235
Sanjay Patel09159b8f2015-06-24 20:40:57 +00005236/// If the switch is only used to initialize one or more phi nodes in a common
5237/// successor block with different constant values, replace the switch with
5238/// lookup tables.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005239static bool SwitchToLookupTable(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
5240 const DataLayout &DL,
5241 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005242 assert(SI->getNumCases() > 1 && "Degenerate switch?");
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00005243
Sumanth Gundapaneni8d50a502017-07-28 22:25:40 +00005244 Function *Fn = SI->getParent()->getParent();
5245 // Only build lookup table when we have a target that supports it or the
5246 // attribute is not set.
5247 if (!TTI.shouldBuildLookupTables() ||
5248 (Fn->getFnAttribute("no-jump-tables").getValueAsString() == "true"))
Hans Wennborgf3254832012-10-30 11:23:25 +00005249 return false;
5250
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005251 // FIXME: If the switch is too sparse for a lookup table, perhaps we could
5252 // split off a dense part and build a lookup table for that.
5253
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005254 // FIXME: This creates arrays of GEPs to constant strings, which means each
5255 // GEP needs a runtime relocation in PIC code. We should just build one big
5256 // string and lookup indices into that.
5257
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005258 // Ignore switches with less than three cases. Lookup tables will not make
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005259 // them faster, so we don't analyze them.
Hans Wennborg4744ac12014-01-15 05:00:27 +00005260 if (SI->getNumCases() < 3)
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005261 return false;
5262
5263 // Figure out the corresponding result for each case value and phi node in the
Eric Christopher572e03a2015-06-19 01:53:21 +00005264 // common destination, as well as the min and max case values.
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005265 assert(SI->case_begin() != SI->case_end());
5266 SwitchInst::CaseIt CI = SI->case_begin();
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00005267 ConstantInt *MinCaseVal = CI->getCaseValue();
5268 ConstantInt *MaxCaseVal = CI->getCaseValue();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005269
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005270 BasicBlock *CommonDest = nullptr;
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00005271
5272 using ResultListTy = SmallVector<std::pair<ConstantInt *, Constant *>, 4>;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005273 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, ResultListTy> ResultLists;
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00005274
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005275 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Constant *> DefaultResults;
5276 SmallDenseMap<PHINode *, Type *> ResultTypes;
5277 SmallVector<PHINode *, 4> PHIs;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005278
5279 for (SwitchInst::CaseIt E = SI->case_end(); CI != E; ++CI) {
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00005280 ConstantInt *CaseVal = CI->getCaseValue();
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005281 if (CaseVal->getValue().slt(MinCaseVal->getValue()))
5282 MinCaseVal = CaseVal;
5283 if (CaseVal->getValue().sgt(MaxCaseVal->getValue()))
5284 MaxCaseVal = CaseVal;
5285
5286 // Resulting value at phi nodes for this case value.
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00005287 using ResultsTy = SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4>;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005288 ResultsTy Results;
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00005289 if (!GetCaseResults(SI, CaseVal, CI->getCaseSuccessor(), &CommonDest,
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00005290 Results, DL, TTI))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005291 return false;
5292
5293 // Append the result from this case to the list for each phi.
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005294 for (const auto &I : Results) {
5295 PHINode *PHI = I.first;
5296 Constant *Value = I.second;
5297 if (!ResultLists.count(PHI))
5298 PHIs.push_back(PHI);
5299 ResultLists[PHI].push_back(std::make_pair(CaseVal, Value));
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005300 }
5301 }
5302
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005303 // Keep track of the result types.
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005304 for (PHINode *PHI : PHIs) {
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005305 ResultTypes[PHI] = ResultLists[PHI][0].second->getType();
5306 }
5307
5308 uint64_t NumResults = ResultLists[PHIs[0]].size();
5309 APInt RangeSpread = MaxCaseVal->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue();
5310 uint64_t TableSize = RangeSpread.getLimitedValue() + 1;
5311 bool TableHasHoles = (NumResults < TableSize);
5312
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005313 // If the table has holes, we need a constant result for the default case
5314 // or a bitmask that fits in a register.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005315 SmallVector<std::pair<PHINode *, Constant *>, 4> DefaultResultsList;
Oliver Stannard4df1cc02016-10-07 08:48:24 +00005316 bool HasDefaultResults =
5317 GetCaseResults(SI, nullptr, SI->getDefaultDest(), &CommonDest,
5318 DefaultResultsList, DL, TTI);
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005319
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005320 bool NeedMask = (TableHasHoles && !HasDefaultResults);
5321 if (NeedMask) {
5322 // As an extra penalty for the validity test we require more cases.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005323 if (SI->getNumCases() < 4) // FIXME: Find best threshold value (benchmark).
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005324 return false;
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005325 if (!DL.fitsInLegalInteger(TableSize))
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005326 return false;
5327 }
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005328
Hans Wennborga6a11a92014-11-18 02:37:11 +00005329 for (const auto &I : DefaultResultsList) {
5330 PHINode *PHI = I.first;
5331 Constant *Result = I.second;
Hans Wennborg7fd5c8442012-09-10 07:44:22 +00005332 DefaultResults[PHI] = Result;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005333 }
5334
Rafael Espindola37dc9e12014-02-21 00:06:31 +00005335 if (!ShouldBuildLookupTable(SI, TableSize, TTI, DL, ResultTypes))
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005336 return false;
5337
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005338 // Create the BB that does the lookups.
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005339 Module &Mod = *CommonDest->getParent()->getParent();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005340 BasicBlock *LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(
5341 Mod.getContext(), "switch.lookup", CommonDest->getParent(), CommonDest);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005342
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005343 // Compute the table index value.
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005344 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
Sanjay Patel73811a12017-09-20 22:31:35 +00005345 Value *TableIndex;
5346 if (MinCaseVal->isNullValue())
5347 TableIndex = SI->getCondition();
5348 else
5349 TableIndex = Builder.CreateSub(SI->getCondition(), MinCaseVal,
5350 "switch.tableidx");
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005351
5352 // Compute the maximum table size representable by the integer type we are
5353 // switching upon.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00005354 unsigned CaseSize = MinCaseVal->getType()->getPrimitiveSizeInBits();
Hans Wennborgac114a32014-01-12 00:44:41 +00005355 uint64_t MaxTableSize = CaseSize > 63 ? UINT64_MAX : 1ULL << CaseSize;
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005356 assert(MaxTableSize >= TableSize &&
5357 "It is impossible for a switch to have more entries than the max "
5358 "representable value of its input integer type's size.");
5359
Hans Wennborgb64cb272015-01-26 19:52:34 +00005360 // If the default destination is unreachable, or if the lookup table covers
5361 // all values of the conditional variable, branch directly to the lookup table
5362 // BB. Otherwise, check that the condition is within the case range.
5363 const bool DefaultIsReachable =
5364 !isa<UnreachableInst>(SI->getDefaultDest()->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg());
5365 const bool GeneratingCoveredLookupTable = (MaxTableSize == TableSize);
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005366 BranchInst *RangeCheckBranch = nullptr;
5367
Hans Wennborgb64cb272015-01-26 19:52:34 +00005368 if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005369 Builder.CreateBr(LookupBB);
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00005370 // Note: We call removeProdecessor later since we need to be able to get the
5371 // PHI value for the default case in case we're using a bit mask.
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005372 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005373 Value *Cmp = Builder.CreateICmpULT(
5374 TableIndex, ConstantInt::get(MinCaseVal->getType(), TableSize));
5375 RangeCheckBranch =
5376 Builder.CreateCondBr(Cmp, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005377 }
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005378
5379 // Populate the BB that does the lookups.
5380 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005381
5382 if (NeedMask) {
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005383 // Before doing the lookup, we do the hole check. The LookupBB is therefore
5384 // re-purposed to do the hole check, and we create a new LookupBB.
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005385 BasicBlock *MaskBB = LookupBB;
5386 MaskBB->setName("switch.hole_check");
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005387 LookupBB = BasicBlock::Create(Mod.getContext(), "switch.lookup",
5388 CommonDest->getParent(), CommonDest);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005389
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005390 // Make the mask's bitwidth at least 8-bit and a power-of-2 to avoid
Juergen Ributzkac9591e92014-11-17 19:39:56 +00005391 // unnecessary illegal types.
5392 uint64_t TableSizePowOf2 = NextPowerOf2(std::max(7ULL, TableSize - 1ULL));
5393 APInt MaskInt(TableSizePowOf2, 0);
5394 APInt One(TableSizePowOf2, 1);
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005395 // Build bitmask; fill in a 1 bit for every case.
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005396 const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHIs[0]];
5397 for (size_t I = 0, E = ResultList.size(); I != E; ++I) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005398 uint64_t Idx = (ResultList[I].first->getValue() - MinCaseVal->getValue())
5399 .getLimitedValue();
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005400 MaskInt |= One << Idx;
5401 }
5402 ConstantInt *TableMask = ConstantInt::get(Mod.getContext(), MaskInt);
5403
5404 // Get the TableIndex'th bit of the bitmask.
5405 // If this bit is 0 (meaning hole) jump to the default destination,
5406 // else continue with table lookup.
5407 IntegerType *MapTy = TableMask->getType();
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005408 Value *MaskIndex =
5409 Builder.CreateZExtOrTrunc(TableIndex, MapTy, "switch.maskindex");
5410 Value *Shifted = Builder.CreateLShr(TableMask, MaskIndex, "switch.shifted");
5411 Value *LoBit = Builder.CreateTrunc(
5412 Shifted, Type::getInt1Ty(Mod.getContext()), "switch.lobit");
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005413 Builder.CreateCondBr(LoBit, LookupBB, SI->getDefaultDest());
5414
5415 Builder.SetInsertPoint(LookupBB);
5416 AddPredecessorToBlock(SI->getDefaultDest(), MaskBB, SI->getParent());
5417 }
5418
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00005419 if (!DefaultIsReachable || GeneratingCoveredLookupTable) {
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005420 // We cached PHINodes in PHIs. To avoid accessing deleted PHINodes later,
Hans Wennborg86ac6302015-04-24 20:57:56 +00005421 // do not delete PHINodes here.
5422 SI->getDefaultDest()->removePredecessor(SI->getParent(),
5423 /*DontDeleteUselessPHIs=*/true);
5424 }
5425
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005426 bool ReturnedEarly = false;
George Burgess IVf9d26af2018-05-05 04:52:26 +00005427 for (PHINode *PHI : PHIs) {
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005428 const ResultListTy &ResultList = ResultLists[PHI];
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005429
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005430 // If using a bitmask, use any value to fill the lookup table holes.
5431 Constant *DV = NeedMask ? ResultLists[PHI][0].second : DefaultResults[PHI];
Sumanth Gundapaneni8d50a502017-07-28 22:25:40 +00005432 StringRef FuncName = Fn->getName();
Sumanth Gundapaneni5372f0a2017-06-30 20:00:01 +00005433 SwitchLookupTable Table(Mod, TableSize, MinCaseVal, ResultList, DV, DL,
5434 FuncName);
Hans Wennborg776d7122012-09-26 09:34:53 +00005435
Manman Ren4d189fb2014-07-24 21:13:20 +00005436 Value *Result = Table.BuildLookup(TableIndex, Builder);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005437
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005438 // If the result is used to return immediately from the function, we want to
5439 // do that right here.
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00005440 if (PHI->hasOneUse() && isa<ReturnInst>(*PHI->user_begin()) &&
5441 PHI->user_back() == CommonDest->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()) {
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005442 Builder.CreateRet(Result);
5443 ReturnedEarly = true;
5444 break;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005445 }
5446
Erik Eckstein0d86c762014-11-27 15:13:14 +00005447 // Do a small peephole optimization: re-use the switch table compare if
5448 // possible.
5449 if (!TableHasHoles && HasDefaultResults && RangeCheckBranch) {
5450 BasicBlock *PhiBlock = PHI->getParent();
5451 // Search for compare instructions which use the phi.
5452 for (auto *User : PHI->users()) {
5453 reuseTableCompare(User, PhiBlock, RangeCheckBranch, DV, ResultList);
5454 }
5455 }
5456
Hans Wennborgf744fa92012-09-19 14:24:21 +00005457 PHI->addIncoming(Result, LookupBB);
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005458 }
5459
5460 if (!ReturnedEarly)
5461 Builder.CreateBr(CommonDest);
5462
5463 // Remove the switch.
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00005464 for (unsigned i = 0, e = SI->getNumSuccessors(); i < e; ++i) {
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005465 BasicBlock *Succ = SI->getSuccessor(i);
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005466
Michael Gottesman63c63ac2013-10-21 05:20:11 +00005467 if (Succ == SI->getDefaultDest())
Michael Gottesmanc024f322013-10-20 07:04:37 +00005468 continue;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005469 Succ->removePredecessor(SI->getParent());
5470 }
5471 SI->eraseFromParent();
5472
5473 ++NumLookupTables;
Hans Wennborgb73c0b02014-03-12 18:35:40 +00005474 if (NeedMask)
5475 ++NumLookupTablesHoles;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005476 return true;
5477}
5478
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005479static bool isSwitchDense(ArrayRef<int64_t> Values) {
5480 // See also SelectionDAGBuilder::isDense(), which this function was based on.
5481 uint64_t Diff = (uint64_t)Values.back() - (uint64_t)Values.front();
5482 uint64_t Range = Diff + 1;
5483 uint64_t NumCases = Values.size();
5484 // 40% is the default density for building a jump table in optsize/minsize mode.
5485 uint64_t MinDensity = 40;
Junmo Parkdb8f6ee2016-08-02 04:38:27 +00005486
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005487 return NumCases * 100 >= Range * MinDensity;
5488}
5489
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005490/// Try to transform a switch that has "holes" in it to a contiguous sequence
5491/// of cases.
5492///
5493/// A switch such as: switch(i) {case 5: case 9: case 13: case 17:} can be
5494/// range-reduced to: switch ((i-5) / 4) {case 0: case 1: case 2: case 3:}.
5495///
5496/// This converts a sparse switch into a dense switch which allows better
5497/// lowering and could also allow transforming into a lookup table.
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005498static bool ReduceSwitchRange(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder,
5499 const DataLayout &DL,
5500 const TargetTransformInfo &TTI) {
5501 auto *CondTy = cast<IntegerType>(SI->getCondition()->getType());
5502 if (CondTy->getIntegerBitWidth() > 64 ||
5503 !DL.fitsInLegalInteger(CondTy->getIntegerBitWidth()))
5504 return false;
5505 // Only bother with this optimization if there are more than 3 switch cases;
5506 // SDAG will only bother creating jump tables for 4 or more cases.
5507 if (SI->getNumCases() < 4)
5508 return false;
5509
5510 // This transform is agnostic to the signedness of the input or case values. We
5511 // can treat the case values as signed or unsigned. We can optimize more common
5512 // cases such as a sequence crossing zero {-4,0,4,8} if we interpret case values
5513 // as signed.
5514 SmallVector<int64_t,4> Values;
5515 for (auto &C : SI->cases())
5516 Values.push_back(C.getCaseValue()->getValue().getSExtValue());
Mandeep Singh Grang636d94d2018-04-13 19:47:57 +00005517 llvm::sort(Values.begin(), Values.end());
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005518
5519 // If the switch is already dense, there's nothing useful to do here.
5520 if (isSwitchDense(Values))
5521 return false;
5522
5523 // First, transform the values such that they start at zero and ascend.
5524 int64_t Base = Values[0];
5525 for (auto &V : Values)
Vitaly Buka524c0a62017-10-17 18:33:15 +00005526 V -= (uint64_t)(Base);
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005527
5528 // Now we have signed numbers that have been shifted so that, given enough
5529 // precision, there are no negative values. Since the rest of the transform
5530 // is bitwise only, we switch now to an unsigned representation.
5531 uint64_t GCD = 0;
5532 for (auto &V : Values)
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00005533 GCD = GreatestCommonDivisor64(GCD, (uint64_t)V);
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005534
5535 // This transform can be done speculatively because it is so cheap - it results
5536 // in a single rotate operation being inserted. This can only happen if the
5537 // factor extracted is a power of 2.
5538 // FIXME: If the GCD is an odd number we can multiply by the multiplicative
5539 // inverse of GCD and then perform this transform.
5540 // FIXME: It's possible that optimizing a switch on powers of two might also
5541 // be beneficial - flag values are often powers of two and we could use a CLZ
5542 // as the key function.
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00005543 if (GCD <= 1 || !isPowerOf2_64(GCD))
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005544 // No common divisor found or too expensive to compute key function.
5545 return false;
5546
Eugene Zelenkoa3fe70d2016-11-30 17:48:10 +00005547 unsigned Shift = Log2_64(GCD);
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005548 for (auto &V : Values)
5549 V = (int64_t)((uint64_t)V >> Shift);
5550
5551 if (!isSwitchDense(Values))
5552 // Transform didn't create a dense switch.
5553 return false;
5554
5555 // The obvious transform is to shift the switch condition right and emit a
5556 // check that the condition actually cleanly divided by GCD, i.e.
5557 // C & (1 << Shift - 1) == 0
5558 // inserting a new CFG edge to handle the case where it didn't divide cleanly.
5559 //
5560 // A cheaper way of doing this is a simple ROTR(C, Shift). This performs the
5561 // shift and puts the shifted-off bits in the uppermost bits. If any of these
5562 // are nonzero then the switch condition will be very large and will hit the
5563 // default case.
Junmo Parkdb8f6ee2016-08-02 04:38:27 +00005564
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005565 auto *Ty = cast<IntegerType>(SI->getCondition()->getType());
5566 Builder.SetInsertPoint(SI);
5567 auto *ShiftC = ConstantInt::get(Ty, Shift);
5568 auto *Sub = Builder.CreateSub(SI->getCondition(), ConstantInt::get(Ty, Base));
Benjamin Krameraa160c22016-08-05 14:55:02 +00005569 auto *LShr = Builder.CreateLShr(Sub, ShiftC);
5570 auto *Shl = Builder.CreateShl(Sub, Ty->getBitWidth() - Shift);
5571 auto *Rot = Builder.CreateOr(LShr, Shl);
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005572 SI->replaceUsesOfWith(SI->getCondition(), Rot);
5573
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00005574 for (auto Case : SI->cases()) {
5575 auto *Orig = Case.getCaseValue();
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005576 auto Sub = Orig->getValue() - APInt(Ty->getBitWidth(), Base);
Chandler Carruth927d8e62017-04-12 07:27:28 +00005577 Case.setValue(
James Molloybade86c2016-08-01 09:34:48 +00005578 cast<ConstantInt>(ConstantInt::get(Ty, Sub.lshr(ShiftC->getValue()))));
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005579 }
5580 return true;
5581}
5582
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005583bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifySwitch(SwitchInst *SI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005584 BasicBlock *BB = SI->getParent();
5585
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005586 if (isValueEqualityComparison(SI)) {
5587 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
5588 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this switch.
5589 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
5590 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(SI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Justin Bogner6f1740d2018-08-20 06:37:11 +00005591 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) || true;
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00005592
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005593 Value *Cond = SI->getCondition();
5594 if (SelectInst *Select = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(Cond))
5595 if (SimplifySwitchOnSelect(SI, Select))
Justin Bogner6f1740d2018-08-20 06:37:11 +00005596 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) || true;
Frits van Bommel8ae07992011-02-28 09:44:07 +00005597
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005598 // If the block only contains the switch, see if we can fold the block
5599 // away into any preds.
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00005600 if (SI == &*BB->instructionsWithoutDebug().begin())
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005601 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(SI, Builder))
Justin Bogner6f1740d2018-08-20 06:37:11 +00005602 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) || true;
Jakob Stoklund Olesen977f41a2012-10-25 18:51:15 +00005603 }
Benjamin Kramerf4ea1d52011-02-02 15:56:22 +00005604
5605 // Try to transform the switch into an icmp and a branch.
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005606 if (TurnSwitchRangeIntoICmp(SI, Builder))
Justin Bogner6f1740d2018-08-20 06:37:11 +00005607 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) || true;
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00005608
5609 // Remove unreachable cases.
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005610 if (eliminateDeadSwitchCases(SI, Options.AC, DL))
Justin Bogner6f1740d2018-08-20 06:37:11 +00005611 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) || true;
Benjamin Kramerd96205c2011-05-14 15:57:25 +00005612
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005613 if (switchToSelect(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
Justin Bogner6f1740d2018-08-20 06:37:11 +00005614 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) || true;
Marcello Maggioni5bbe3df2014-10-14 01:58:26 +00005615
Sanjay Patelb80daf02017-10-22 19:10:07 +00005616 if (Options.ForwardSwitchCondToPhi && ForwardSwitchConditionToPHI(SI))
Justin Bogner6f1740d2018-08-20 06:37:11 +00005617 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) || true;
Hans Wennborg4ab4a8e2011-06-18 10:28:47 +00005618
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005619 // The conversion from switch to lookup tables results in difficult-to-analyze
5620 // code and makes pruning branches much harder. This is a problem if the
5621 // switch expression itself can still be restricted as a result of inlining or
5622 // CVP. Therefore, only apply this transformation during late stages of the
5623 // optimisation pipeline.
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +00005624 if (Options.ConvertSwitchToLookupTable &&
5625 SwitchToLookupTable(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
Justin Bogner6f1740d2018-08-20 06:37:11 +00005626 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) || true;
Hans Wennborg8a62fc52012-09-06 09:43:28 +00005627
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005628 if (ReduceSwitchRange(SI, Builder, DL, TTI))
Justin Bogner6f1740d2018-08-20 06:37:11 +00005629 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) || true;
James Molloyb2e436d2016-08-01 07:45:11 +00005630
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005631 return false;
5632}
5633
5634bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyIndirectBr(IndirectBrInst *IBI) {
5635 BasicBlock *BB = IBI->getParent();
5636 bool Changed = false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005637
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005638 // Eliminate redundant destinations.
5639 SmallPtrSet<Value *, 8> Succs;
5640 for (unsigned i = 0, e = IBI->getNumDestinations(); i != e; ++i) {
5641 BasicBlock *Dest = IBI->getDestination(i);
David Blaikie70573dc2014-11-19 07:49:26 +00005642 if (!Dest->hasAddressTaken() || !Succs.insert(Dest).second) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005643 Dest->removePredecessor(BB);
5644 IBI->removeDestination(i);
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005645 --i;
5646 --e;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005647 Changed = true;
5648 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005649 }
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005650
5651 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 0) {
5652 // If the indirectbr has no successors, change it to unreachable.
5653 new UnreachableInst(IBI->getContext(), IBI);
5654 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(IBI);
5655 return true;
5656 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005657
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005658 if (IBI->getNumDestinations() == 1) {
5659 // If the indirectbr has one successor, change it to a direct branch.
5660 BranchInst::Create(IBI->getDestination(0), IBI);
5661 EraseTerminatorInstAndDCECond(IBI);
5662 return true;
5663 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005664
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005665 if (SelectInst *SI = dyn_cast<SelectInst>(IBI->getAddress())) {
5666 if (SimplifyIndirectBrOnSelect(IBI, SI))
Justin Bogner6f1740d2018-08-20 06:37:11 +00005667 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) || true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005668 }
5669 return Changed;
5670}
5671
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005672/// Given an block with only a single landing pad and a unconditional branch
5673/// try to find another basic block which this one can be merged with. This
5674/// handles cases where we have multiple invokes with unique landing pads, but
5675/// a shared handler.
5676///
5677/// We specifically choose to not worry about merging non-empty blocks
5678/// here. That is a PRE/scheduling problem and is best solved elsewhere. In
5679/// practice, the optimizer produces empty landing pad blocks quite frequently
5680/// when dealing with exception dense code. (see: instcombine, gvn, if-else
5681/// sinking in this file)
5682///
5683/// This is primarily a code size optimization. We need to avoid performing
5684/// any transform which might inhibit optimization (such as our ability to
5685/// specialize a particular handler via tail commoning). We do this by not
5686/// merging any blocks which require us to introduce a phi. Since the same
Jesper Antonsson514b6b52018-06-28 10:55:04 +00005687/// values are flowing through both blocks, we don't lose any ability to
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005688/// specialize. If anything, we make such specialization more likely.
5689///
5690/// TODO - This transformation could remove entries from a phi in the target
5691/// block when the inputs in the phi are the same for the two blocks being
5692/// merged. In some cases, this could result in removal of the PHI entirely.
5693static bool TryToMergeLandingPad(LandingPadInst *LPad, BranchInst *BI,
5694 BasicBlock *BB) {
5695 auto Succ = BB->getUniqueSuccessor();
5696 assert(Succ);
5697 // If there's a phi in the successor block, we'd likely have to introduce
5698 // a phi into the merged landing pad block.
5699 if (isa<PHINode>(*Succ->begin()))
5700 return false;
5701
5702 for (BasicBlock *OtherPred : predecessors(Succ)) {
5703 if (BB == OtherPred)
5704 continue;
5705 BasicBlock::iterator I = OtherPred->begin();
5706 LandingPadInst *LPad2 = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(I);
5707 if (!LPad2 || !LPad2->isIdenticalTo(LPad))
5708 continue;
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00005709 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I)
5710 ;
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005711 BranchInst *BI2 = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(I);
5712 if (!BI2 || !BI2->isIdenticalTo(BI))
5713 continue;
5714
David Majnemer1efa23d2016-02-20 01:07:45 +00005715 // We've found an identical block. Update our predecessors to take that
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005716 // path instead and make ourselves dead.
Craig Topper61998282018-06-09 05:04:20 +00005717 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Preds;
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005718 Preds.insert(pred_begin(BB), pred_end(BB));
5719 for (BasicBlock *Pred : Preds) {
5720 InvokeInst *II = cast<InvokeInst>(Pred->getTerminator());
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005721 assert(II->getNormalDest() != BB && II->getUnwindDest() == BB &&
5722 "unexpected successor");
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005723 II->setUnwindDest(OtherPred);
5724 }
5725
5726 // The debug info in OtherPred doesn't cover the merged control flow that
5727 // used to go through BB. We need to delete it or update it.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005728 for (auto I = OtherPred->begin(), E = OtherPred->end(); I != E;) {
5729 Instruction &Inst = *I;
5730 I++;
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005731 if (isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(Inst))
5732 Inst.eraseFromParent();
5733 }
5734
Craig Topper61998282018-06-09 05:04:20 +00005735 SmallPtrSet<BasicBlock *, 16> Succs;
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005736 Succs.insert(succ_begin(BB), succ_end(BB));
5737 for (BasicBlock *Succ : Succs) {
5738 Succ->removePredecessor(BB);
5739 }
5740
5741 IRBuilder<> Builder(BI);
5742 Builder.CreateUnreachable();
5743 BI->eraseFromParent();
5744 return true;
5745 }
5746 return false;
5747}
5748
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005749bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyUncondBranch(BranchInst *BI,
5750 IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005751 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Balaram Makamb05a5572017-07-19 08:53:34 +00005752 BasicBlock *Succ = BI->getSuccessor(0);
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005753
Reid Klecknerbca59d22016-05-02 19:43:22 +00005754 // If the Terminator is the only non-phi instruction, simplify the block.
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005755 // If LoopHeader is provided, check if the block or its successor is a loop
5756 // header. (This is for early invocations before loop simplify and
Balaram Makamb05a5572017-07-19 08:53:34 +00005757 // vectorization to keep canonical loop forms for nested loops. These blocks
5758 // can be eliminated when the pass is invoked later in the back-end.)
Serguei Katkov66182d62018-02-08 07:16:29 +00005759 // Note that if BB has only one predecessor then we do not introduce new
5760 // backedge, so we can eliminate BB.
Balaram Makamb05a5572017-07-19 08:53:34 +00005761 bool NeedCanonicalLoop =
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +00005762 Options.NeedCanonicalLoop &&
Vedant Kumare0b5f862018-05-10 23:01:54 +00005763 (LoopHeaders && pred_size(BB) > 1 &&
Serguei Katkov66182d62018-02-08 07:16:29 +00005764 (LoopHeaders->count(BB) || LoopHeaders->count(Succ)));
Reid Klecknerbca59d22016-05-02 19:43:22 +00005765 BasicBlock::iterator I = BB->getFirstNonPHIOrDbg()->getIterator();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005766 if (I->isTerminator() && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock() &&
Balaram Makamb05a5572017-07-19 08:53:34 +00005767 !NeedCanonicalLoop && TryToSimplifyUncondBranchFromEmptyBlock(BB))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005768 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005769
Sanjay Patelca146972017-09-19 20:58:14 +00005770 // If the only instruction in the block is a seteq/setne comparison against a
5771 // constant, try to simplify the block.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005772 if (ICmpInst *ICI = dyn_cast<ICmpInst>(I))
5773 if (ICI->isEquality() && isa<ConstantInt>(ICI->getOperand(1))) {
5774 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I)
5775 ;
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00005776 if (I->isTerminator() &&
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005777 tryToSimplifyUncondBranchWithICmpInIt(ICI, Builder, DL, TTI, Options))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005778 return true;
5779 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005780
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005781 // See if we can merge an empty landing pad block with another which is
5782 // equivalent.
5783 if (LandingPadInst *LPad = dyn_cast<LandingPadInst>(I)) {
Eugene Zelenko5adb96c2017-10-26 00:55:39 +00005784 for (++I; isa<DbgInfoIntrinsic>(I); ++I)
5785 ;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005786 if (I->isTerminator() && TryToMergeLandingPad(LPad, BI, BB))
Philip Reames2b969d72015-03-24 22:28:45 +00005787 return true;
5788 }
5789
Manman Rend33f4ef2012-06-13 05:43:29 +00005790 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
5791 // branches to us and our successor, fold the comparison into the
5792 // predecessor and use logical operations to update the incoming value
5793 // for PHI nodes in common successor.
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +00005794 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, Options.BonusInstThreshold))
Justin Bogner6f1740d2018-08-20 06:37:11 +00005795 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) || true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005796 return false;
5797}
5798
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00005799static BasicBlock *allPredecessorsComeFromSameSource(BasicBlock *BB) {
5800 BasicBlock *PredPred = nullptr;
5801 for (auto *P : predecessors(BB)) {
5802 BasicBlock *PPred = P->getSinglePredecessor();
5803 if (!PPred || (PredPred && PredPred != PPred))
5804 return nullptr;
5805 PredPred = PPred;
5806 }
5807 return PredPred;
5808}
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005809
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005810bool SimplifyCFGOpt::SimplifyCondBranch(BranchInst *BI, IRBuilder<> &Builder) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005811 BasicBlock *BB = BI->getParent();
Matt Morehouse236cdaf2018-03-22 17:07:51 +00005812 const Function *Fn = BB->getParent();
5813 if (Fn && Fn->hasFnAttribute(Attribute::OptForFuzzing))
5814 return false;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005815
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005816 // Conditional branch
5817 if (isValueEqualityComparison(BI)) {
5818 // If we only have one predecessor, and if it is a branch on this value,
5819 // see if that predecessor totally determines the outcome of this
5820 // switch.
5821 if (BasicBlock *OnlyPred = BB->getSinglePredecessor())
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00005822 if (SimplifyEqualityComparisonWithOnlyPredecessor(BI, OnlyPred, Builder))
Justin Bogner6f1740d2018-08-20 06:37:11 +00005823 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) || true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005824
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005825 // This block must be empty, except for the setcond inst, if it exists.
5826 // Ignore dbg intrinsics.
Florian Hahn3df88442018-04-30 20:10:53 +00005827 auto I = BB->instructionsWithoutDebug().begin();
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005828 if (&*I == BI) {
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00005829 if (FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Justin Bogner6f1740d2018-08-20 06:37:11 +00005830 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) || true;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005831 } else if (&*I == cast<Instruction>(BI->getCondition())) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005832 ++I;
Devang Patel58380552011-05-18 20:53:17 +00005833 if (&*I == BI && FoldValueComparisonIntoPredecessors(BI, Builder))
Justin Bogner6f1740d2018-08-20 06:37:11 +00005834 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) || true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005835 }
5836 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005837
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005838 // Try to turn "br (X == 0 | X == 1), T, F" into a switch instruction.
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005839 if (SimplifyBranchOnICmpChain(BI, Builder, DL))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005840 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005841
Chad Rosier4ab37c02016-05-06 14:25:14 +00005842 // If this basic block has a single dominating predecessor block and the
5843 // dominating block's condition implies BI's condition, we know the direction
5844 // of the BI branch.
5845 if (BasicBlock *Dom = BB->getSinglePredecessor()) {
5846 auto *PBI = dyn_cast_or_null<BranchInst>(Dom->getTerminator());
5847 if (PBI && PBI->isConditional() &&
Craig Topperdfd01ea2017-07-06 16:29:43 +00005848 PBI->getSuccessor(0) != PBI->getSuccessor(1)) {
5849 assert(PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB || PBI->getSuccessor(1) == BB);
Chad Rosierdfd1de62017-08-01 20:18:54 +00005850 bool CondIsTrue = PBI->getSuccessor(0) == BB;
Chad Rosier4ab37c02016-05-06 14:25:14 +00005851 Optional<bool> Implication = isImpliedCondition(
Chad Rosierdfd1de62017-08-01 20:18:54 +00005852 PBI->getCondition(), BI->getCondition(), DL, CondIsTrue);
Chad Rosier4ab37c02016-05-06 14:25:14 +00005853 if (Implication) {
5854 // Turn this into a branch on constant.
5855 auto *OldCond = BI->getCondition();
5856 ConstantInt *CI = *Implication
5857 ? ConstantInt::getTrue(BB->getContext())
5858 : ConstantInt::getFalse(BB->getContext());
5859 BI->setCondition(CI);
5860 RecursivelyDeleteTriviallyDeadInstructions(OldCond);
Justin Bogner6f1740d2018-08-20 06:37:11 +00005861 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) || true;
Chad Rosier4ab37c02016-05-06 14:25:14 +00005862 }
5863 }
5864 }
5865
Dan Gohman5ab9c0a2012-01-05 23:58:56 +00005866 // If this basic block is ONLY a compare and a branch, and if a predecessor
5867 // branches to us and one of our successors, fold the comparison into the
5868 // predecessor and use logical operations to pick the right destination.
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +00005869 if (FoldBranchToCommonDest(BI, Options.BonusInstThreshold))
Justin Bogner6f1740d2018-08-20 06:37:11 +00005870 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) || true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005871
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005872 // We have a conditional branch to two blocks that are only reachable
5873 // from BI. We know that the condbr dominates the two blocks, so see if
5874 // there is any identical code in the "then" and "else" blocks. If so, we
5875 // can hoist it up to the branching block.
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005876 if (BI->getSuccessor(0)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
5877 if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005878 if (HoistThenElseCodeToIf(BI, TTI))
Justin Bogner6f1740d2018-08-20 06:37:11 +00005879 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) || true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005880 } else {
5881 // If Successor #1 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00005882 // execute Successor #0 if it branches to Successor #1.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005883 TerminatorInst *Succ0TI = BI->getSuccessor(0)->getTerminator();
5884 if (Succ0TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
5885 Succ0TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(1))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005886 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(0), TTI))
Justin Bogner6f1740d2018-08-20 06:37:11 +00005887 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) || true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005888 }
Craig Topperf40110f2014-04-25 05:29:35 +00005889 } else if (BI->getSuccessor(1)->getSinglePredecessor()) {
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005890 // If Successor #0 has multiple preds, we may be able to conditionally
Sanjay Patel0a2ada72014-07-06 23:10:24 +00005891 // execute Successor #1 if it branches to Successor #0.
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005892 TerminatorInst *Succ1TI = BI->getSuccessor(1)->getTerminator();
5893 if (Succ1TI->getNumSuccessors() == 1 &&
5894 Succ1TI->getSuccessor(0) == BI->getSuccessor(0))
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00005895 if (SpeculativelyExecuteBB(BI, BI->getSuccessor(1), TTI))
Justin Bogner6f1740d2018-08-20 06:37:11 +00005896 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) || true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005897 }
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005898
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005899 // If this is a branch on a phi node in the current block, thread control
5900 // through this block if any PHI node entries are constants.
5901 if (PHINode *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BI->getCondition()))
5902 if (PN->getParent() == BI->getParent())
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00005903 if (FoldCondBranchOnPHI(BI, DL, Options.AC))
Justin Bogner6f1740d2018-08-20 06:37:11 +00005904 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) || true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00005905
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005906 // Scan predecessor blocks for conditional branches.
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith6c990152014-07-21 17:06:51 +00005907 for (pred_iterator PI = pred_begin(BB), E = pred_end(BB); PI != E; ++PI)
5908 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>((*PI)->getTerminator()))
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005909 if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
Philip Reamesb42db212015-10-14 22:46:19 +00005910 if (SimplifyCondBranchToCondBranch(PBI, BI, DL))
Justin Bogner6f1740d2018-08-20 06:37:11 +00005911 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) || true;
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005912
James Molloy4de84dd2015-11-04 15:28:04 +00005913 // Look for diamond patterns.
5914 if (MergeCondStores)
5915 if (BasicBlock *PrevBB = allPredecessorsComeFromSameSource(BB))
5916 if (BranchInst *PBI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(PrevBB->getTerminator()))
5917 if (PBI != BI && PBI->isConditional())
Alexey Bataev978e2e42017-08-29 20:06:24 +00005918 if (mergeConditionalStores(PBI, BI, DL))
Justin Bogner6f1740d2018-08-20 06:37:11 +00005919 return simplifyCFG(BB, TTI, Options) || true;
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005920
Chris Lattner25c3af32010-12-13 06:25:44 +00005921 return false;
5922}
5923
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005924/// Check if passing a value to an instruction will cause undefined behavior.
5925static bool passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(Value *V, Instruction *I) {
5926 Constant *C = dyn_cast<Constant>(V);
5927 if (!C)
5928 return false;
5929
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00005930 if (I->use_empty())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005931 return false;
5932
David Majnemer1fea77c2016-06-25 07:37:27 +00005933 if (C->isNullValue() || isa<UndefValue>(C)) {
Benjamin Kramerd12e82e2012-10-04 16:11:49 +00005934 // Only look at the first use, avoid hurting compile time with long uselists
Chandler Carruthcdf47882014-03-09 03:16:01 +00005935 User *Use = *I->user_begin();
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005936
5937 // Now make sure that there are no instructions in between that can alter
5938 // control flow (eg. calls)
Duncan P. N. Exon Smith0a12729f2016-08-16 23:57:56 +00005939 for (BasicBlock::iterator
5940 i = ++BasicBlock::iterator(I),
5941 UI = BasicBlock::iterator(dyn_cast<Instruction>(Use));
5942 i != UI; ++i)
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005943 if (i == I->getParent()->end() || i->mayHaveSideEffects())
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005944 return false;
5945
5946 // Look through GEPs. A load from a GEP derived from NULL is still undefined
5947 if (GetElementPtrInst *GEP = dyn_cast<GetElementPtrInst>(Use))
5948 if (GEP->getPointerOperand() == I)
5949 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, GEP);
5950
5951 // Look through bitcasts.
5952 if (BitCastInst *BC = dyn_cast<BitCastInst>(Use))
5953 return passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(V, BC);
5954
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005955 // Load from null is undefined.
5956 if (LoadInst *LI = dyn_cast<LoadInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00005957 if (!LI->isVolatile())
Manoj Gupta77eeac32018-07-09 22:27:23 +00005958 return !NullPointerIsDefined(LI->getFunction(),
5959 LI->getPointerAddressSpace());
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005960
Benjamin Kramer0655b782011-08-26 02:25:55 +00005961 // Store to null is undefined.
5962 if (StoreInst *SI = dyn_cast<StoreInst>(Use))
Andrew Tricka0a5ca02013-03-07 01:03:35 +00005963 if (!SI->isVolatile())
Manoj Gupta77eeac32018-07-09 22:27:23 +00005964 return (!NullPointerIsDefined(SI->getFunction(),
5965 SI->getPointerAddressSpace())) &&
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005966 SI->getPointerOperand() == I;
David Majnemer1fea77c2016-06-25 07:37:27 +00005967
5968 // A call to null is undefined.
5969 if (auto CS = CallSite(Use))
Manoj Gupta77eeac32018-07-09 22:27:23 +00005970 return !NullPointerIsDefined(CS->getFunction()) &&
5971 CS.getCalledValue() == I;
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005972 }
5973 return false;
5974}
5975
5976/// If BB has an incoming value that will always trigger undefined behavior
Nick Lewyckye87d54c2011-12-26 20:37:40 +00005977/// (eg. null pointer dereference), remove the branch leading here.
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005978static bool removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BasicBlock *BB) {
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00005979 for (PHINode &PHI : BB->phis())
5980 for (unsigned i = 0, e = PHI.getNumIncomingValues(); i != e; ++i)
5981 if (passingValueIsAlwaysUndefined(PHI.getIncomingValue(i), &PHI)) {
5982 TerminatorInst *T = PHI.getIncomingBlock(i)->getTerminator();
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005983 IRBuilder<> Builder(T);
5984 if (BranchInst *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(T)) {
Benjamin Kramerc7fc81e2017-12-30 15:27:33 +00005985 BB->removePredecessor(PHI.getIncomingBlock(i));
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005986 // Turn uncoditional branches into unreachables and remove the dead
5987 // destination from conditional branches.
5988 if (BI->isUnconditional())
5989 Builder.CreateUnreachable();
5990 else
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00005991 Builder.CreateBr(BI->getSuccessor(0) == BB ? BI->getSuccessor(1)
5992 : BI->getSuccessor(0));
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00005993 BI->eraseFromParent();
5994 return true;
5995 }
5996 // TODO: SwitchInst.
5997 }
5998
5999 return false;
6000}
6001
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00006002bool SimplifyCFGOpt::run(BasicBlock *BB) {
Chris Lattner3f5823f2003-08-24 18:36:16 +00006003 bool Changed = false;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00006004
Chris Lattnerd7beca32010-12-14 06:17:25 +00006005 assert(BB && BB->getParent() && "Block not embedded in function!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00006006 assert(BB->getTerminator() && "Degenerate basic block encountered!");
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00006007
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00006008 // Remove basic blocks that have no predecessors (except the entry block)...
6009 // or that just have themself as a predecessor. These are unreachable.
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006010 if ((pred_empty(BB) && BB != &BB->getParent()->getEntryBlock()) ||
Dan Gohman4a63fad2010-08-14 00:29:42 +00006011 BB->getSinglePredecessor() == BB) {
Nicola Zaghend34e60c2018-05-14 12:53:11 +00006012 LLVM_DEBUG(dbgs() << "Removing BB: \n" << *BB);
David Majnemeree0cbbb2016-02-24 17:30:48 +00006013 DeleteDeadBlock(BB);
6014 return true;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00006015 }
6016
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00006017 // Check to see if we can constant propagate this terminator instruction
6018 // away...
Frits van Bommelad964552011-05-22 16:24:18 +00006019 Changed |= ConstantFoldTerminator(BB, true);
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00006020
Dan Gohman1a951062009-10-30 22:39:04 +00006021 // Check for and eliminate duplicate PHI nodes in this block.
6022 Changed |= EliminateDuplicatePHINodes(BB);
6023
Benjamin Kramerfb212a62011-08-26 01:22:29 +00006024 // Check for and remove branches that will always cause undefined behavior.
6025 Changed |= removeUndefIntroducingPredecessor(BB);
6026
Chris Lattner2e3832d2010-12-13 05:10:48 +00006027 // Merge basic blocks into their predecessor if there is only one distinct
6028 // pred, and if there is only one distinct successor of the predecessor, and
6029 // if there are no PHI nodes.
Chris Lattner2e3832d2010-12-13 05:10:48 +00006030 if (MergeBlockIntoPredecessor(BB))
6031 return true;
Andrew Trickf3cf1932012-08-29 21:46:36 +00006032
Michael Zolotukhinad371e02017-12-21 01:22:13 +00006033 if (SinkCommon && Options.SinkCommonInsts)
6034 Changed |= SinkCommonCodeFromPredecessors(BB);
6035
Devang Patel15ad6762011-05-18 18:01:27 +00006036 IRBuilder<> Builder(BB);
6037
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00006038 // If there is a trivial two-entry PHI node in this basic block, and we can
6039 // eliminate it, do so now.
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006040 if (auto *PN = dyn_cast<PHINode>(BB->begin()))
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00006041 if (PN->getNumIncomingValues() == 2)
Mehdi Aminia28d91d2015-03-10 02:37:25 +00006042 Changed |= FoldTwoEntryPHINode(PN, TTI, DL);
Dan Gohman20af5a02008-03-11 21:53:06 +00006043
Devang Patela7ec47d2011-05-18 20:35:38 +00006044 Builder.SetInsertPoint(BB->getTerminator());
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006045 if (auto *BI = dyn_cast<BranchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00006046 if (BI->isUnconditional()) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006047 if (SimplifyUncondBranch(BI, Builder))
6048 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00006049 } else {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006050 if (SimplifyCondBranch(BI, Builder))
6051 return true;
Chris Lattner1d057612010-12-13 06:36:51 +00006052 }
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006053 } else if (auto *RI = dyn_cast<ReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006054 if (SimplifyReturn(RI, Builder))
6055 return true;
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006056 } else if (auto *RI = dyn_cast<ResumeInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006057 if (SimplifyResume(RI, Builder))
6058 return true;
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006059 } else if (auto *RI = dyn_cast<CleanupReturnInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006060 if (SimplifyCleanupReturn(RI))
6061 return true;
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006062 } else if (auto *SI = dyn_cast<SwitchInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006063 if (SimplifySwitch(SI, Builder))
6064 return true;
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006065 } else if (auto *UI = dyn_cast<UnreachableInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006066 if (SimplifyUnreachable(UI))
6067 return true;
Davide Italianoacf60652017-11-10 20:46:21 +00006068 } else if (auto *IBI = dyn_cast<IndirectBrInst>(BB->getTerminator())) {
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006069 if (SimplifyIndirectBr(IBI))
6070 return true;
Chris Lattnere42732e2004-02-16 06:35:48 +00006071 }
6072
Chris Lattner031340a2003-08-17 19:41:53 +00006073 return Changed;
Chris Lattner466a0492002-05-21 20:50:24 +00006074}
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00006075
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00006076bool llvm::simplifyCFG(BasicBlock *BB, const TargetTransformInfo &TTI,
6077 const SimplifyCFGOptions &Options,
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +00006078 SmallPtrSetImpl<BasicBlock *> *LoopHeaders) {
Sanjay Patel4c33d522017-10-04 20:26:25 +00006079 return SimplifyCFGOpt(TTI, BB->getModule()->getDataLayout(), LoopHeaders,
Sanjay Patel0f9b4772017-09-27 14:54:16 +00006080 Options)
Dehao Chenf6c00832016-05-18 19:44:21 +00006081 .run(BB);
Jakob Stoklund Olesen916f48a2010-02-05 22:03:18 +00006082}